John 19:31 — Word Study
N1904Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
BSA<the>ho Thereforeoun the Jews,Ioudaios [people from Judah, Jewish leaders] since [the] Preparation [before the Sabbath, a time to get ready] was, so thathina notmē may remainmenō▸ onepi theho crossstauros [a stake or instrument of execution] theho bodiessōma [physical corpses] onen theho Sabbath —sabbaton [a special day of rest, a great day] waseimi▸ forgar a highmegas <the>ho dayhēmera of thatekeinos <the>ho Sabbath —sabbaton [a day of rest and worship] askederōtaō▸ <the>ho PilatePilatos [the Roman governor] thathina may be brokenkatagnumi▸ [to crack or shatter] theirautos [the whole physical person] <the>ho legsskelos [from the hip down] andkai they may be taken away.airō▸ [taken away, lifted up]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| Οἱ | <the> | Article, nominative, plural |
| οὖν | Therefore | Conjunction |
| Ἰουδαῖοι, | the Jews, | Adjective, nominative, plural |
| ἐπεὶ | since | |
| παρασκευὴ | [the] Preparation | |
| ἦν, | was, | |
| ἵνα | so that | Conjunction |
| μὴ | not | Particle, negative |
| μείνῃ | may remain | Verb, aorist, active |
| ἐπὶ | on | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| σταυροῦ | cross | Noun, genitive, singular |
| τὰ | the | Article, nominative, plural |
| σώματα | bodies | Noun, nominative, plural |
| ἐν | on | Preposition |
| τῷ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| σαββάτῳ, | Sabbath — | Noun, dative, singular |
| ἦν | was | Verb, imperfect, active |
| γὰρ | for | Conjunction |
| μεγάλη | a high | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἡ | <the> | Article, nominative, singular |
| ἡμέρα | day | Noun, nominative, singular |
| ἐκείνου | of that | Demonstrative pronoun, genitive, singular |
| τοῦ | <the> | Article, genitive, singular |
| σαββάτου, | Sabbath — | Noun, genitive, singular |
| ἠρώτησαν | asked | Verb, aorist, active |
| τὸν | <the> | Article, accusative, singular |
| Πιλᾶτον | Pilate | Noun, accusative, singular |
| ἵνα | that | Conjunction |
| κατεαγῶσιν | may be broken | Verb, second aorist, passive |
| αὐτῶν | their | Personal pronoun, genitive, plural |
| τὰ | <the> | Article, nominative, plural |
| σκέλη | legs | Noun, nominative, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἀρθῶσιν. | they may be taken away. | Verb, aorist, passive |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | It was the day of Preparation, and the next day was a High Sabbath. In order that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, the Jews asked Pilate to have the legs broken and the bodies removed. |
| KJV | The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away. |
| ASV | The Jews therefore, because it was the Preparation, that the bodies should not remain on the cross upon the sabbath (for the day of that sabbath was a high day), asked of Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away. |
| YLT | The Jews, therefore, that the bodies might not remain on the cross on the sabbath, since it was the preparation, (for that sabbath day was a great one,) asked of Pilate that their legs may be broken, and they taken away. |
| WEB | Therefore the Jews, because it was the Preparation Day, so that the bodies wouldn’t remain on the cross on the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was a special one), asked of Pilate that their legs might be broken and that they might be taken away. |
| BBE | Now it was the day of getting ready for the Passover, and so that the bodies might not be on the cross on the Sabbath (because the day of that Sabbath was a great day), the Jews made a request to Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away. |
Where translations differ is primarily in the rendering of specific phrases, particularly regarding the day of Preparation and the actions requested by the Jews.
The sentence is structured around a main clause with several subordinate clauses that provide context and purpose for the actions taken.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbμένω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — John 19:31
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Crucifixion of Jesusgenerated
John 19:31 describes the urgency of the Jews to ensure that the bodies of those crucified did not remain on the crosses during the Sabbath. This reflects their adherence to Jewish law, which dictated that no work should be done on the Sabbath, a day of rest. The verse highlights the tension between the religious observance of the Jews and the events surrounding the crucifixion of Jesus, emphasizing the significance of timing in the narrative.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | John 19:14–42 | It was the day of Preparation for the Passover, about the sixth hour. And Pilate said to the Jews, “Here is your King!” |
| 2 | Matthew 27:62 | The next day, the one after Preparation Day, the chief priests and Pharisees assembled before Pilate. |
| 3 | Mark 15:42 | Now it was already evening. Since it was Preparation Day (that is, the day before the Sabbath), |
| 4 | Deuteronomy 21:22–23 | If a man has committed a sin worthy of death, and he is executed, and you hang his body on a tree, |
| 5 | Leviticus 23:7–16 | On the first day you are to hold a sacred assembly; you are not to do any regular work. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 8 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — παρασκευὴ, paraskeuēgenerated
The Greek word παρασκευὴ (paraskeuē) means 'preparation' and specifically refers to the day before the Sabbath, a time when people would prepare for the day of rest. It appears in the context of Jewish customs and rituals, as seen in Matthew 27:62, and indicates the importance of being ready for the Sabbath.
In this verse, it signifies the urgency of the Jews to ensure that the bodies of the crucified would not remain on the crosses during the Sabbath, reflecting their commitment to the law and customs of their faith.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is translated in the Berean Standard Bible as 'It was the day of Preparation, and the next day was a High Sabbath.' This is echoed in the KJV and ASV, which also refer to the day of Preparation and the Sabbath.
Where translations differ is in the rendering of specific phrases. The BBE translates it as 'the day of getting ready for the Passover,' while the WEB describes it as 'the Preparation Day.' Additionally, the BSB uses 'bodies removed,' while the KJV states 'that they might be taken away.'
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb in the verse is ἦν, was, which governs the structure of the sentence. It connects the subject, 'the day of Preparation,' with the description of the following day as a High Sabbath. The sentence includes subordinate clauses that describe the actions taken by the Jews and their request to Pilate.
The structure highlights the sequence of events: the Jews' concern about the bodies remaining on the cross, leading to their request for the legs to be broken, which is followed by the action of removing the bodies.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
παρασκευὴ is not directly found in the Septuagint but is closely associated with the concept of preparation for the Sabbath, which is a recurring theme in Jewish law. The observance of the Sabbath is emphasized in various passages, including Exodus 20:8.
The term reflects the cultural and religious practices of the Jews, who were required to prepare for the Sabbath, ensuring that no work was done on that day.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
John 19:31 explains that it was the day before the Sabbath, known as Preparation Day. The next day was a High Sabbath, a special day of rest. The Jews asked Pilate to break the legs of those crucified so that their bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
The 'day of Preparation' refers to the day before the Sabbath, when Jews would prepare for the day of rest by completing necessary tasks.
The Jews wanted the bodies removed to avoid violating the Sabbath law, which prohibited work on that day.
A High Sabbath is a special Sabbath that coincides with a significant Jewish festival, requiring additional observance and preparation.
Breaking the legs of those crucified was a method to hasten death, preventing the bodies from remaining on the cross during the Sabbath.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- How do I prepare for my own times of rest and reflection?
- What significance does the Sabbath hold in my life today?
- In what ways can I ensure I honor the traditions and practices of my faith?
- How can I respond to the urgency of spiritual matters in my own life?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church writings reference this verse to discuss the significance of the Sabbath and the actions of the Jews during Jesus' crucifixion.
What do they [i.e., the Jews] take it to mean when it says, “For six consecutive days you shall gather. On the sixth day, however,Early Church Fathers on John 19 →
The Jews who strained at a gnat and swallowed a camel, after their audacious wickedness, reason scrupulously about the day: The Jews therefore because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath.Early Church Fathers on John 19 →
But the Jews, on the other hand, who swallowed the camel and strained at the gnat, having wrought so atrocious a deed, are very precise concerning the day.Early Church Fathers on John 19 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on John 19:31 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleThe Jews therefore, because it was the preparation,.... That is, either of the passover, as in John 19:14 which was the Chagigah or grand festival in which they offered their peace offerings and slew
Read John Gill on John 19 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryThe Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might
Read Robert Jamieson on John 19 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleIt was the preparation; not to the passover, (for that was celebrated the night before), but to the weekly sabbath; and they judged according to the law, , that the land would be defiled if the persons executed were not buried that day, but their bodies should remain on the tree all night, especially on the sabbath, which began immediately after sunset. And this sabbath was a more than ordinary sabbath, for it was not only the weekly sabbath, but also their second day of unleavened bread; which, and the last day, were both very solemn days, as may be seen, . This makes them come and beseech Pilate that the bodies might be taken down, and in order to it, that their legs might be broken, lest…
Read Matthew Poole on John 19 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments31 The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away. Ver. 31. Because it was the preparation] Their preparation to the sabbath began at three of the clock in the afternoon? The best and wealthiest of them, even those that had many servants, did with their own hands further the preparation; so that sometimes the masters themselves would chop herbs, sweep the house, cleave wood, kindle the fire. Our ancestors also were wont to give over work on the Saturday, when it rang to even song. And usually as…
Read John Trapp on John 19 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(31) The account of the piercing of the side (John 19:31-37) is peculiar to St. John. The preparation,. . . . an high day.—Comp. Excursus F: The Day of the Crucifixion of our Lord, p. 559. The Roman custom was to allow the bodies to remain on the cross. To the Jews this was defilement (Deuteronomy 21:22-23), against which they were the more anxious to take precaution because the approaching Sabbath was “an high day.” That their legs might be broken.—The breaking of the legs by means of clubs was a Roman punishment, known by the name of crurifragium, which sometimes accompanied crucifixion, and appears also to have been used as a separate punishment. It is not otherwise clear that its…
Read Charles John Ellicott on John 19 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 31. It was the preparation] Every Sabbath had a preparation which began at the ninth hour (that is, three o'clock) the preceding evening. Josephus, Ant. b. xvi. c. 6, s. 2, recites an edict of the Emperor Augustus in favour of the Jews, which orders, "that no one shall be obliged to give bail or surety on the Sabbath day, nor on the preparation before it, after the ninth hour." The time fixed here was undoubtedly in conformity to the Jewish custom, as they began their preparation at three o'clock on the Friday evening. That the bodies should not remain] For the law, Deuteronomy 21:22-23, ordered that the bodies of criminals should not hang all night; and they did not wish to have the…
Read AdamClarke on John 19 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges31–42. The petition of the Jews and the petition of Joseph31. As in John 18:28, the Jews shew themselves to be among those ‘who strain out a gnat and swallow a camel.’ In the midst of deliberate judicial murder they are scrupulous about ceremonial observances.The Jews therefore] The ‘therefore,’ as in John 19:23, probably does not refer to what immediately precedes: it looks back to John 19:20-21. The Jews still continue their relentless hostility. They do not know whether any one of the three sufferers is dead or not; their request shews that; so that ‘therefore’ cannot mean in consequence of Jesus’ death. In order to save the Sabbath, and perhaps also to inflict still further suffering…
Read Cambridge on John 19 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleThe preparation - John 19:14. That the bodies ... - The law required that the bodies of those who were hung should not remain suspended during the night. See Deuteronomy 21:22-23.
Read Albert Barnes on John 19 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
It was the day of Preparation, and the next day was a High Sabbath. In order that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, the Jews asked Pilate to have the legs broken and the bodies removed.
Therefore the Jews, because it was the Preparation Day, so that the bodies wouldn’t remain on the cross on the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was a special one), asked of Pilate that their legs might be broken and that they might be taken away.
It was the day of Preparation, and the next day was a High Sabbath. In order that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath, the Jews asked Pilate to have the legs broken and the bodies removed.
Then, because it was the day of preparation, so that the bodies should not stay on the crosses on the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was an especially important one), the Jewish leaders asked Pilate to have the victims’ legs broken and the bodies taken down.
Tyndale line
The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
The Jews therefore, because it was the Preparation, that the bodies should not remain on the cross upon the sabbath (for the day of that sabbath was a high day), asked of Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
The Jews therefore, because it was the Preparation, that the bodies should not remain on the cross upon the sabbath (for the day of that sabbath was a high day), asked of Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath, (for that sabbath was a great day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
The Iewes then (because it was the Preparation, that the bodies should not remaine vpon the crosse on the Sabbath day: for that Sabbath was an hie day) besought Pilate that their legges might be broken, and that they might be taken downe.
Strictly literal
The Jews therefore, that the bodies might not remain on the cross on the sabbath, for it was [the] preparation, (for the day of that sabbath was a great [day],) demanded of Pilate that their legs might be broken and they taken away.
The Jews, therefore, that the bodies might not remain on the cross on the sabbath, since it was the preparation, (for that sabbath day was a great one,) asked of Pilate that their legs may be broken, and they taken away.
The Jews, therefore, that the bodies might not remain on the cross on the Sabbath, since it was the Preparation (for that Sabbath day was a great one), asked of Pilate that their legs may be broken, and they [are] taken away.
Then the Jews, because it was the day of preparation, and so that the bodies would not remain on the cross during the Sabbath (for that Sabbath was especially important), asked Pilate to break their legs and to remove them.
From the Latin
Then the Jews, (because it was the parasceve,) that the bodies might not remain on the cross on the sabbath day, (for that was a great sabbath day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
Simplified
It was preparation day, and the Jewish leaders didn't want to leave the bodies on the crosses during the Sabbath day (in fact this was a special Sabbath), so they asked Pilate to break the legs, so that the bodies could be removed.
Now it was the day of getting ready for the Passover, and so that the bodies might not be on the cross on the Sabbath (because the day of that Sabbath was a great day), the Jews made a request to Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Judæi ergo (quoniam parasceve erat) ut non remanerent in cruce corpora sabbato (erat enim magnus dies ille sabbati), rogaverunt Pilatum ut frangerentur eorum crura, et tollerentur.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܝܗܘܕܝܐ ܕܝܢ ܡܛܠ ܕܥܪܘܒܬܐ ܗܘܬ ܐܡܪܝܢ ܠܐ ܢܒܘܬܘܢ ܦܓܪܐ ܗܠܝܢ ܥܠ ܙܩܝܦܝܗܘܢ ܡܛܠ ܕܫܒܬܐ ܢܓܗܐ ܝܘܡܐ ܗܘܐ ܓܝܪ ܪܒܐ ܝܘܡܐ ܕܫܒܬܐ ܗܝ ܘܒܥܘ ܡܢ ܦܝܠܛܘܣ ܕܢܬܒܪܘܢ ܫܩܝܗܘܢ ܕܗܢܘܢ ܙܩܝܦܐ ܘܢܚܬܘܢ ܐܢܘܢ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, — — — ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
Οἱ οὖν Ἰουδαῖοι, — — — ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ, ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, ἠρώτησαν τὸν Πιλᾶτον ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρθῶσιν.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| ἐπεὶ since | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
| παρασκευὴ [the] Preparation | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
| ἦν, was, | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in John 19:31
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word οὖν (oun) is a particle used to express consequence, sequence, or to resume a narrative. It translates to 'therefore,' 'then,' or 'accordingly,' and appears frequently in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:10 and Romans 5:9. It can also serve in exhortations and questions, indicating what follows logically from previous statements.
οὖν,
particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence),
wherefore, therefore, then: Mt 3:10, Lk 3:9, Jo 8:38, Ac 1:21, Ro 5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mt 3:8, Lk 11:35, Ac 3:19, Ro 6:12, al.; in questions, Mt 13:28, Mk 15:12, Jo 8:[5], Ro 6:1, al.; continuing a…
Read the full entry →οὖν ἃ conj. indicating that something follows from another necessarily; [al. regard the primary force of the particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than illative; cf. Passow, or L.andS.s. v.; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii. p- 707 sqq.; Biiumlein p. 173 sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 52; Donaldson p. 571; Rost in a program “ Ueber Ableitung ” u.s.w. p.2; Klotz p. 717; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sentences together logically, then, therefore, accordingly, consequently, these things being so, [ (Klotz, Rost, al., have wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptep. ὄν (cf. ὄντως) ; but see Baumlein or Kiihner u.s.); ef. W. § 53, 8]: Mt. iii. 10; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denying me [οἵ. W. 455 (424)]); Mt. xviii. 4; Lk. iii.9; xvi. 27; In. viii. 38 (καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν, and ye accordingly, i. e.…
Read the full entry →οὖν. This common particle, which occurs in the NT nearly 500 times, is used in our sources in a variety of connexions, the exact shade of meaning being determined by the context. (1) For the causal meaning ‘‘therefore” we may cite BGU II. 423" (ii/aA.p.) (= Sevectzons, p. 91) Kal καλῶς pol ἐστιν. ἐρωτῶ ce οὖν, κύριέ pou πατήρ, γράψον μοι ἐπιστόλιον πρῶτον μὲν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου... , “it is well with me. I beg you, therefore, my lord father, write me a letter, first regarding your health ... ,” and P Oxy XIV. 16651 (iii/A.D.), where a son in urgent need of oil writes to his father—dvayxalws οὖν, ἐὰν ἔτι παρὰ σεαυτῷ χρ[ἴ]ον ἔχῃς, δήλωσον ἢ τῷ vie σου ἢ ᾧ ἐὰν σὺ βούλῃ τούτους μοι ἐν τάχει παρα[σ]χεῖν, ‘perforce, therefore, if you have still with you any unguent, instruct your son or any one else you wish to supply me with them speedily ” (Edd.). (2) Οὖν is very common in a looser…
Read the full entry →οὖν (oun) — therefore/then.
οὖν,
Ionic dialect and Doric dialect ὦν (the latter in [Refs 8th c.BC+], adverb certainly, in fact, confirming something, frequently in contrast with something which is not confirmed, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in combination with γε (see. γοῦν), γάρ, οὔτε or μήτε, ὡς, ἐπεί, μέν, etc.:
1. really, φημὶ γὰρ οὖν κατανεῦσαι.. Κρονίωνα for I declare that Zeus did really promise.., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόφρα γὰρ οὖν ἑπόμεσθα.., ὄφρ᾽ for we followed them up to the very point, where.., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐλέχθησαν λόγοι ἄπιστοι μὲν ἐνίοισι Ἑλλήνων, ἐλέχθησαν δ᾽ ὦν but they really were spoken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Θηβαῖοι μὲν ταῦτα λέγουσι.., Πλαταιῆς δ᾽ οὐχ ὁμολογοῦσι.., ἐκ δ᾽ οὖν τῆς γῆς ἀνεχώρησαν at all events they did return, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so δ᾽ οὖν after a parenthesis; εἰ δή τις ὑμῶν οὕτως ἔχει,—οὐκ ἀξιῶ μὲν γὰρ ἔγωγε,—εἰ…
οὖν
oun
apparently a primary word; (adverbially) certainly, or
(conjunctionally) accordingly:--and (so, truly), but, now (then), so
(likewise then), then, therefore, verily, wherefore.
οὖν
Cj.
therefore, then
οὖν really, at all events, used like γοῦν to dismiss a perplexing subject, οὔτ᾽ οὖν ἀγγελίῃς ἔτι πείθομαι, οὔτε θεοπροπίης ἐμπάζομαι Od.; ἐλέχθησαν λόγοι ἄπιστοι μὲν ἐνίοισι Ἑλλήνων, ἐλέχθησαν δ᾽ ὦν but they really were spoken, Hdt.; εἴτ᾽ οὖν, εἴτε μὴ γενήσεται whether it shall be really so, or no, Eur.; εἴτ᾽ οὖν ἀληθὲς εἴτ᾽ οὖν ψεῦδος Plat.; εἰ δ᾽ ἔστιν, ὥσπερ οὖν ἔστι, θεός if he is, as he surely is, a god, id. Plat.
added to indef. Pronouns and Advs., like Lat. cunque, ὅστις whoever, ὁστισοῦν whosoever; ὅπως how, ὁπωσοῦν howsoever; ἄλλος ὁστισοὖν another, be he who he may; so, ὁποιοσοῦν, ὁποσοσοῦν, ὁπωσοῦν, ὁποθενοῦν…
Read the full entry →Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
539 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 496 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 110 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὸ μὲν οὖν κάλλος τῶν νοημάτων τῆς κοσμοποιίας οὐδεὶς οὔτε ποιητὴς οὔτε λογογράφος ἀξίως ἂν ὑμνῆσαι δύναιτο·
ἤδη μὲν οὖν καὶ πρότερον διενοήθην, ὅτε τὸν πόλεμον συνέγραφον, δηλῶσαι τίνες ὄντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ τίσι χρησάμενοι τύχαις ὑφʼ οἵῳ τε παιδευθέντες νομοθέτῃ τὰ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ἄσκησιν ἀρετῆς πόσους τε πολέμους ἐν μακροῖς…
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
χαίρειν. τοῦ παρʼ Ἑρμώνακτος τῶν ὁμοτίμων τοῖς συγγενέσι καὶ ὑποδιοικητοῦ χρηματισμοῦ ἀντίγραφον ὑπόκειται. κατακολουθήσας οὖν τοῖς διʼ αὐτοῦ σημαινομένοις χρημάτισον ἀπὸ τῆς ἐν Παθύρει τραπέζης, συνυπογράφοντος Φίβιος τοῦ…
δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος βεα … ρων … δια … στρατιωτῶν
ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως οὖν εἰδότες εὐθαρσεῖς ὑπάρχητε ἐκρίναμεν σημῆναι. ἔρρωσθε ἔτους λ Φαῶφι ιθ
The Greek word Ἰουδαῖος (ioudaios) means 'Jew' and is derived from the name Judah. It refers to a person of Jewish descent or belonging to the Jewish race, covering both men and women. In the New Testament, it is used to describe Jewish individuals, Jewish Christians, and the Jewish people as a whole, often in contexts of conflict with early Christians.
Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον
(< Ἰούδας),
Jewish: ἀνήρ, Ac 10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Ac 21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jo 3:22; χώρα, Mk 1:5. Substantively,
᾿Ιουδαῖος, -aia, -atov, (Ἰούδα), [ Aristot. (in Joseph. ce. Ap. 1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut., al.; Sept.; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to nouns, belonging to the Jewish race: avnp, Acts x. 28; xxii 8, (1 Mace. ii. 23); ἄνθρωπος, Acis xxi. 89; ψευδοπροφήτης, Acts xiii. 6; ἀρχιερεύς, Acts xix. 14 ; γυνή, Acts XVi. 1; xxiv. 24; γῆ, Jn. 111. 22; χώρα, Mk.i.d. b. without a noun, substantively, Jewish as respects birth, race, religion; aJew: Jn. ἵν. 9; Acts xviii. 2, 24; Ro. ii. 28 sq.; plur., Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι (07377), before the exile citizens of the kingdom of Judah; after the exile all the Israelites [ef. Wright in B.D. 8. v. Jew]), the Jews, the Jewish race: Mt. ii. 2; xxvii. 11, 29; Mk. vii. 3; xv. 2; Jn. ii. 6; iv. 22; ν. 1; xviii. 33, ete.; ᾿Ιουδαῖοί τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Acts xiv. 1; xviii. 4; xix. 10; 1 Co. i. 24; Ἰουδαῖοί re καὶ…
Read the full entry →Ἰουδαῖος (Ioudaios) — Jew.
Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ,
a Jewish man: Ἰουδαία, a Jewish woman; ἡ Ἰουδαία (i.e. γῆ) “Judaea”: —Ἰουδα-ϊκός, ή, όν, “Jewish”, [LXX] adverb -κῶς [NT+1st c.AD+]
Ἰουδαῖος
Ioudaios
from 2448 (in the sense of 2455 as a country); Judaean, i.e. belonging
to Jehudah:--Jew(-ess), of Judaea.
see GREEK for 2448
see GREEK for 2455
Ἰουδαῖος, αία, αῖον
Adj
Jewish
Ἰουδαῖος Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Ἰουδαία, a Jewess; ἡἸουδαία (sub. γῆ), Judaea.
Adj-NPM — Adjective · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
A-NPM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
juz, jooz.
See JEW.
The name borne by the Hebrews among foreign nations, especially after the return from Babylon; from Judah their ancestor. See HEBREWS.
195 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 194 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 51 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Μωυσέως τοῦ κατὰ μέν τινας νομοθέτου τῶν Ἰουδαίων, κατὰ δέ τινας ἑρμηνέως νόμων ἱερῶν, τὸν βίον ἀναγράψαι διενοήθην, ἀνδρὸς τὰ πάντα μεγίστου καὶ τελειοτάτου, καὶ γνώριμον τοῖς ἀξίοις μὴ ἀγνοεῖν αὐτὸν ἀποφῆναι.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
ἀληθῶς ἐπὶ Ποντίου Πιλάτου καὶ Ἡρώδου τετράρχου καθηλωμένον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐν σαρκί, ἀφ̓ οὖ καρποῦ ἡμεῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ θεομακαρίστου αὐτοῦ πάθους, ἵνα ἄρῃ σύσσημον εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας διὰ τῆς ἀναστάσεως εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ πιστοὺς αὐτοῦ, εἴτε ἐν Ἰουδαίοις εἴτε ἐν…
ὥρας τῇ α τοῦ Τυβὶ τοῦ ιζ ἔτους Τιβερίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ καταπεριστάς με Σαμβᾶς Ἰουδαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ Κερκεθουήρεως καταγεινόμενος ἐν … Τεβτύνει vestiges πληγὰς … καὶ ἐτραυμάτισέν με
β ἔτους Νέρωνος Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος Παχὼν τιμῆς δερμάτων γ διὰ Σακολάου Ἰουδαίου δραχμαὶ ιβ … … ὁμοίως Ἰσάκι Ἰουδαίωι διὰ Πουωρέως Παβῶτος … … δραχμαὶ η
τὸ ἀπόχυμα Ἰσᾶτος καὶ παραλάβωμεν τὸ ἐλάδιον λοιπὸν ἐὰν δόξῃ σοι. ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Τεύφιλος Ἰουδαῖος λέγων ὅτι ἤχθην εἰς γεωργίαν καὶ βούλομαι πρὸς Σαβεῖνον ἀπελθεῖν. οὔτε γὰρ εἴρηκε ἡμῖν
ἐπεί is a conjunction meaning 'when' or 'since,' used both temporally and causally. It can indicate a time after an event or provide a reason for something, as seen in various New Testament verses like Matthew 18:32 and Hebrews 2:14. The word can also imply alternatives, as in 'else' or 'otherwise.' Its usage spans classical and biblical Greek, reflecting its versatility in connecting clauses.
Of cause, since, because: Mt 18:32 21:46 27:6, Mk 15:42, Lk 1:34, Jo 13:29 19:31, Ac 13:46 (Rec., WH, mg.), I Co 14:12, II Co 11:18 13:3, He 5:2, 11 6:13 9:17 11:11; ἐ. οὖν, He 2:14 4:6. With ellipsis, otherwise, else: Ro 11:6, 22,
ἐπεί, [fr. temporal ἐπί and εἰ, lit. thereupon when; Curtius, Erliut. ete. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjunction, (Lat. cum), when, since, [ef. W.§ 53,1]; used 1. of time, after; so once in the N. Τ᾿: Lk. vii. 1 (where LT Tr txt. WH txt. ἐπειδή). 2. of cause, etc., since, seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 T Tr WH]; xxvil. 6; Mk. xv. 42; Lk.i. 34; Jn. xiii. 29; xix. 31; 1 Co. xiv. 12; 2Co. xi. 18}; xiii.3; Heb. v. 2,11; vi. 13; ix. 17; xi. 11; ἐπεὶ οὖν since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6. Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech, we must often supply in thought between ἐπεί and the proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it is (or were) otherwise; so that the particle, although retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered otherwise, else, or for then, (Germ. sonst); so in Ro. xi. 6, 22; Heb. ix. 26; ἐπεὶ dpa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [ef. W. § 53…
Read the full entry →ἐπεί. Citations of this very common word are hardly necessary, | but we may quote PSI IV. 435}2 (B.c. 258-7) ἐπεὶ δὲ τάχιστα ὑγιάσθην, παρεγένετό τις ἐκ KviSov, P Lond 4238 (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 31) ἐπεὶ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ σου τυγχάνει βαρέως ἔχουσα, ‘since your mother is much annoyed about it,” and P Meyer 20* (1st half iii/A.D.) εἰπὲ τῇ ἱερίσσᾳ (2. -ἰσσῃ) τοῦ ἱεροῦ τῶν “HppwvOitav, ἵνα ἐκεῖ πέμπω τὰς | ἐπιστολάς, ἐπὶ (1: ἐπεὶ) εὐσήμαντά ἐστιν, “tell the priestess | of the sanctuary of Hermonthitis that I am sending my letters thither, since she is well known.’’ For ἐπεὶ μή see BGU II. | 530° (i/A.D.) ἡ μήτηρ σου μέμφεταί σε, ἐπὶ μὴ ἀντέγραψας | αὐτῇ--α letter from ἃ father to his son: cf. the similar use | of ὅτι μή in Jn 318 and see Pro/eg. p. 239f. and Abbott | Joh. Gr. p. 534 ff Ἔπεί = alioguin, as in Rom 11°, is | illustrated by Wetstein ad /., and by Field JVotes, p.…
Read the full entry →ἐπεί (epei) — since.
ἐπεί,
conjunction, both temporal and causal; also ἐπειδή, ἐπείτε. OF TIME (ἐπειδή is more frequently in this sense in Prose), after that, since, when, from [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I. with Ind.,
I.1. of a definite occurrence in past time, mostly with aorist, ἐπεί π᾽ εὔξαντο after they had prayed, [Refs 8th c.BC+]after [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with imperfect, ἐπειδὴ εἱστιώμεθ᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect, ἐπειδὴ ἐξηπάτησθε.. after you had been deceived.., [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but generally the aorist is found, the pluperfect being used only for special emphasis: with imperfect to express an action not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, [Refs 5th…
ἐπεί
epei
from 1909 and 1487; thereupon, i.e. since (of time or
cause):--because, else, for that (then, -asmuch as), otherwise, seeing
that, since, when.
see GREEK for 1909
see GREEK for 1487
ἐπεί
Cj.
after, for, since, otherwise
ἐπεί conjunct., temporal and causal, like Lat. quum:
OF TIME, after that, after (postquam), since, when (quum), with aor. to express a complete action, or imperf. to express one not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, Xen.
= ἐξ οὗ, from the time when, ever since, ἐπείτε παρέλαβον τὸν θρόνον since I came to the throne, Hdt.
with Subjunct., ἄν or κε being added, so that ἐπεί becomes ἐπάν, ἐπήν, ionic ἐπεάν, or ἐπεί κε: — referring to future time, ἐπὴν ἕλωμεν when we shall have taken the city, Il.:—also whenever, ἐπεί κε λίπῃ ὀστέα θυμός Od.
27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἐπεὶ οὖν ὁρατός τε καὶ αἰσθητὸς ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, ἀναγκαίως ἂν εἴη καὶ γενητός·
τὴν δὲ αἰτίαν ἱκανὸς μέν εἰμι ἀποδοῦναι καὶ νῦν, ἐπεὶ δʼ ὑπέσχημαι τὴν αἰτιολογίαν πάντων ἰδίᾳ συγγραψάμενος παραδώσειν, εἰς τότε καὶ τὴν περὶ αὐτῆς ἑρμηνείαν ἀναβάλλομαι.
καὶ πάλιν λέγει ὁ προφήτης, ἐπεὶ ὡς λίθος ἰσχυρὸς ἐτέθη εἰς συντριβήν: Ἰδού, ἐμβαλῶ εἰς τὰ θεμέλια Σιὼν λίθον πολυτελῆ, ἐκλεκτόν, ἀκρογωνιαῖον, ἔντιμον.
r Ἐσθλάδας τῶι πατρὶ καὶ τῆι μητρὶ χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρῶσθαι· ἐπεὶ πλειονάκις σοι γράφω περὶ τοῦ διανδραγαθήσαντα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμέλεσθαι μέχρι τοῦ τὰ πράγματα ἀποκαταστῆναι ,
ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τῶν ἐνταῦθα θεῶν διατελοῦμεν. ἐπεὶ προκεχειρίκαμεν … ν καὶ Νεχούθην προστάτ … του μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος
ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος βεα … ρων … δια … στρατιωτῶν
The Greek word παρασκευή (i.e., *paraskeuē*) means 'preparation' and is often used to refer specifically to the day before the Sabbath, particularly in the context of Jewish practices. It appears in the New Testament as the 'day of preparation' for the Passover and is associated with several Gospel passages, including Matthew 27:62 and John 19:14. The term can also encompass broader meanings of readiness and equipment.
παρα-σκευή, -ῆς, ἡ,
[in LXX: Ex 35:24 39:22 (42) (עֲבֹדָה, with v.l., ἀποσκ-, κατασκ-), Jth 2:17 4:5, I Mac 9:35 א, II Mac 15:21*;]
preparation.
equipment (Jth 2:17 4:5).
παρασκευή is found in the general sense o. ‘‘ preparation” in P Petr II. 4511. 17 (B.c. 246) τοιαύτην παρασκευήν, P Strass I. 41° (A.b. 250) airodpe[v δοθῆναι ἡμῖν ἡμέραν πρὸς] παρασκευὴν τῆς δίκης, and Sy// 503 (-- 596)}3 (c. B.C. 200) τῆ[9 τε τῶν σίτων παρ]ασκευῆς ἐφρόντισεν. For παρασκευή as the technical designation for Friday (cf. MGr) see Didache viii. 1 ὑμεῖς δὲ νηστεύσατε τετράδα καὶ παρασκευήν, “but ye shall fast on the fourth day and the preparation day (Friday)”: cf. Jos. Antt, XVI. 163 (vi. 2). The questions raised by the use of παρασκευή in the Synoptics and Jn lie outside our province, but see Abbott Joh. Gr. p. 92. Herwerden Lex. s.v. cites ἡ παρασκευή = dies Veneris from Clem. Al. p. 316, 15…
Read the full entry →παρασκευή (paraskeuē) — Preparation.
παρασκευ-ή, ἡ,
preparation, δείπνου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρασκευὴν σίτου παραγγείλας having ordered corn to be prepared, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τούτῳ παρασκευῆς ἦσαν in this state of preparation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; preparation, practice, as of a speaker preparing his speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγειν ἀπὸ παρασκευῆς, opposed to αὐτοσχεδίως, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; also, in a speech, preparatory section, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
__b with Preps., ἐκ παρασκευῆς of set purpose, by arrangement, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μάχη ἐγένετο ἐκ π. a pitched battle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ὀλίγης παρασκευῆς at short notice, offhand, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἦσαν ἐν π. πολέμου were engaged in preparing for it (compare κατασκευή), [Refs 5th…
παρασκευή
paraskeue
as if from 3903; readiness:--preparation.
see GREEK for 3903
παρασκευή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
the day before the Sabbath
παρασκευή παρα-σκευή, ἡ, preparation, Hdt., attic; ἐν τούτῳ παρασκευῆς in this state of preparation, Thuc.:— preparation of a speech, Xen.:—with Preps., ἐκ παρασκευῆς of set purpose, μάχη ἐγένετο ἐκ π. a pitched battle, Thuc.; so, ἀπὸ παρασκευῆς id. Thuc.; δι᾽ ὀλίγης παρασκευῆς at short notice, offhand, id. Thuc.; ἐν παρασκευῇ in course of preparation, id. Thuc.
a providing, procuring, π. φίλων καὶ οὐσίας Plat.
an intrigue or cabal, for the purpose of gaining a verdict or carrying a measure, Dem., etc.
that which is prepared, equipage, Lat. apparatus, Plat., Xen.: an armament, Thuc., Dem.
generally, power, means, Thuc.
among the Jews, the day of preparation, the day before the sabbath of the Passover, NTest.
prep-a-ra'-shun: The concordances indicate that the word "preparation" occurs only twice in the Old Testament, once in 1Ch 22:5, where it is used in the ordinary sense "to make preparation," and once in Na 2:3, "in the day of his preparation," both of them translating the same Hebrew root and requiring no special elucidation. In Eph 6:15 the apostle speaks of the equipment of the Christian as including the "feet shod with the preparation of the gospel of peace," which means, according to Thayer, "with the promptitude and alacrity which the gospel produces."
The word occurs with technical significance ("the Preparation") in the gospel narratives of the crucifixion, translating the Greek paraskeue (
6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
οὗτος τὸν πολὺν ἄκρατον καὶ τῶν σιτίων τὴν παρασκευὴν ἀποδέχεται ὡς ἀγαθόν, βλαπτόμενος καὶ τὸ σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν·
μὴ προσεμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ τὴν θηλὴν ἀλλʼ ἀποστραφέντος καὶ τοῦτʼ ἐπὶ πολλῶν ποιήσαντος γυναικῶν ἡ Μαριάμη παρατυγχάνουσα τοῖς γινομένοις οὐχ ὥστε ἐκ παρασκευῆς δοκεῖν ἀλλὰ κατὰ θεωρίαν, μάτην, εἶπεν, ὦ βασίλισσα, ταύτας ἐπὶ τροφῇ τοῦ παιδὸς μετακαλῇ…
νηστεύουσι γὰρ δευτέρᾳ σαββάτων καὶ πέμπτῃ: ὑμεῖς δὲ νηστεύσατε τετράδα καὶ παρασκευήν.
βιβλία αὐτῆς ἐνθάδε οὐκ ἔχει. Ὡριγένης νεώτερος ῥήτωρ εἶπεν· αἰτοῦμεν δοθῆναι ἡμῖν ἡμέραν πρὸς παρασκευὴν τῆς δίκης. Ἀμμώνιος ῥήτωρ εἶπεν· οὐ δεῖ μοι βιβλίων εἰς τὴν παροῦσαν δίκην, ὁ
σου τὸ ἄλλο ἥμισυ ἐγὼ ἀπ … περὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ διαβαστάξαι αὐτὸν ἕως τῆς παρασκευῆς … παράσχε αὐτῷ ἕνα ἀρχέφοδον εἰς ἀπαίτησιν τ … αὐτ
τὰ ταμιακὰ τῶν ληφθέντων ἐκ τῆς ἀνωτέρω Θηβαίδος … ἀπὸ τῶν ἐνταῦθα τῆς δεούσης παρασκευῆς τυχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ταμιακῶν χρημάτων πρὸς ἑτοιμασίαν του δεσπότου ἡμῶν καὶ πάντα νικῶντος αὐτοκράτορος
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.
ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…
Read the full entry →ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.
ἵνα,
adverb,
I. of Place,
I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
ἵνα
hina
probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the
demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose
or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,
(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3363
ἵνα
Cj.
in order that, so that
ἵνα Adverb,
of Place,
demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.
relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.
= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.
of circumstance, when, at which, Od.
Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:
with subj.,
after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.
after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.
after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.
with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…
So
(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.
"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).
King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.
So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…
ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον
vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ
ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους
μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.
μή,
subjective negative particle,
used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]
As a neg. adv., not;
with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.
μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…
Read the full entry →μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…
Read the full entry →μή (mē) — not.
μή,
Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)
__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,
__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]
μή
me
a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an
absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an
interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an
affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +
lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,
nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in
substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,
3373, 3375, 3378.
see GREEK for 3756
see GREEK for 3362
see GREEK for 3363
see GREEK for 3364
see GREEK for 3372
see GREEK for 3373
see GREEK for 3375
see GREEK for 3378
μή
Neg.prt.
not, lest
μή mē 1x
a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12
Particle-N — Particle · negativeparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative
1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
μένω (menō) means to stay, abide, or remain. It can refer to physical location, duration of time, or a state of being, often indicating a sense of permanence or continuity. In the New Testament, it is used in various contexts, such as remaining in Christ (John 15:4) or the Holy Spirit (John 14:17). The entries do not present significant disagreement.
μένω,
[in LXX for עמד, קוּם etc.;]
to stay, abide, remain.
Intrans.;
of place: seq. ἐν, Lk 8:27, al.; παρά, c. dat. pers., Jo 1:40, al; σύν, Lk 1:56; καθ’ ἑαυτόν, Ac 28:16; c. adv., ἐκεῖ, Mt 10:11; ὧδε, Mt 26:38; metaph., I Jo 2:18; of the Holy Spirit, Jo 1:32, 33 14:17; of Christ, Jo 6:56 15:4, al.; ὁ θεός, I Jo 4:15, conversely, of Christians, Jo 6:56 15:4, I Jo 4:15, al.; ὁ λόγος τ. θεοῦ, I Jo 2:14; ἡ ἀλήθεια, II Jo 2, al.
Of time;
μένω; impf. ἔμενον; fut. μενῶ; 1 aor. ἔμεινα ; plupf. μεμενήκειν without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19; ef. ἐκβάλλω, [and see 7'df. Proleg. p. 120 sq.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. chiefly for my and Dip, also for 731, 30)", ete.; to remain, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference τ. to PLACE; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn, tarry: ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27; x. 7; Jn. vii. 9; xi. 6; Acts xx.15; xxvii. 31; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2 Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: ἐκεῖ, Mt. x.11; Jn. ii. 12; x. 40; [xi. 54 WHTrtxt.]; ὧδε, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34; παρά τινι, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40); xiv. 25; Acts xviii. 20 [RG]; xxi. 7; σύν τινι, Lk. i. 56; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30. iq. larry as a guest, lodge: ποῦ, Jn. i. 38 (39); ἐν w. dat. of place, Lk. xix.5; Acts ix.43; παρά τινι, in one’s house, Acts ix. 43; xviii. 3; xxi. 8; of tarrying for a night, μετά…
Read the full entry →μένω, “‘remain,” ‘‘abide,” is used intransitively with reference to (1) place, in P Hib I. 555 (B.c. 250) o]¥ yap σχολάζω μένειν πλείονα χρ[όνον, ‘for I have no leisure to remain longer,” P Oxy IV. 7445 (B.c. 1) (= Selections, Ρ- 32) ἐγὼ ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρέᾳ (= εἰᾳ) μένω, P Fay 137? (question to an oracle—i/A.D.) χρημάτισόν μοι, ἢ μείνωι ἐν Βακχιάδι; P ΒΥ] IT. 23210 (ii/A.p.) οἱ δημόσιοι προσεφώνησαν αὐτῷ ὅτι μένις ἐν τῇ κω (6 κώμῃ), and Preisigke 2639 ποῦ μένι | Θερμοῦθις ἡ γυνὴ Π]ασοράσιος ; (cf. Jn 1387); see also Schulze Gr. Lat. p. 22 f.: (2) ¢éme, in P Ryl II. 1725! (A.D. 208) μενεῖς ἐπὶ τῇ προγεγραμμένῃ μισθώσι, ‘the aforesaid lease shall continue secured to you” (Edd.), and P Oxy VI. 90358 (iv/a.D.) ἔμεινεν λέγων, “the kept saying”: and (3) condition, in P Flor 11. 2321 (iii/a.p.) ἵνα μὴ λίαν ὃ χόρτος τῆς Θεοξενίδος ἄκοπος μείνῃ, ‘in order that the hay of Theoxenis may not remain too…
Read the full entry →μένω (menō) — to stay.
μένω,
Epic dialect infinitive μενέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] present participle μίνονσαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Epic dialect, Ionic dialect imperfect μένεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Epic dialect, Ionic dialect future μενέω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Attic dialect μενῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἔμεινα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect μεμένηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]; compare μίμνω:—stay, wait:
I. stand fast, in battle, οὐδ᾽ ἴφθιμοι Λύκιοι μένον, ἀλλὰ φόβηθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φεύγειν μηδὲ μένειν Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. κατὰ χώραν, of soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. stay at home, stay where one is, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. b lodge, stay, παρὰ ματρί [Refs 5th c.BC+]
μένω
meno
a primary verb; to stay (in a given place, state, relation or
expectancy):--abide, continue, dwell, endure, be present, remain,
stand, tarry (for), X thine own.
μένω
v.
I remain, abide
μένω menō 118x
pluperfect, μεμενήκειν, to stay, Mt. 26:38; Acts 27:31; to continue; 1 Cor. 7:11; 2 Tim. 2:13; to dwell, lodge, sojourn, Jn. 1:39; Acts 9:43; to remain, Jn. 9:41; to rest, settle, Jn. 1:32, 33; 3:36; to last, endure, Mt. 11:23; Jn. 6:27; 1 Cor. 3:14; to survive, Read the full entry →
μένω Lat. maneo, to stay stand fast, abide, in battle, Hom., Aesch.; μ. κατὰ χώραν, of soldiers, Thuc.
to stay at home, stay where one is, not stir, Il.; μ. εἴσω δόμων Aesch.; κατ᾽ οἶκον Eur., etc.:—but, μ. ἀπό τινος to stay away from, Il.
to stay, tarry, Hom., etc.
of things, to be lasting, remian, last, stand, στήλη μένει ἔμπεδον Il., etc.
of condition, to remain as one was, of a maiden, Il.; ἢ μείνωσιν ὅρκοι if oaths hold good, Eur.; μ. ἐπὶ τούτων to remain contented with.., Dem.
to abide by an opinion, conviction, etc., ἐπὶ τῶι ἀληθεῖ Plat.
impers. c. inf., it remains for one to do, ἀνθρώποισι κατθανεῖν μένει Eur.
trans. to await, expect, wait for, c. acc., Il.; so, like Lat. manere hostem, Hom., etc.:—so, also c. acc. et inf., ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν…
Verb-AAS-3S — Verb · aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · singularaorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular
119 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 47 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 118 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 39 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὀρθὴ δ’ οὐκ ἐπιδέχεται σύγκρισιν οὐδ’ ὀρθοτέρα γίνεται παρ’ ἑτέραν, ἀλλ’ ἐν ὁμοίῳ μένει τὴν ἰδίαν φύσιν οὔποτ’ ἀλλάττουσα.
μένει δʼ ἄχρι δεῦρο κατὰ γῆν τὴν Σειρίδα.
ἔτι καὶ ἔτι ἐρωτῶ ὑμᾶς: ἑαυτῶν γίνεσθε νομοθέται ἀγαθοί, ἑαυτῶν μένετε σύμβουλοι πιστοί, ἄρατε ἐξ ὑμῶν πᾶσαν ὑπόκρισιν.
ς βεβαιούτω αὐτῷ ὁ Κάστωρ ως … δημοσίῳ ἡ συγγραφὴ κυρία ἔστω πανταχῇ ἐπιφερομένη. Μένων Καλιστράτου Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς μεμίσθωμαι παρὰ Κάστορος Καλλιστράτου τὸν ὑπάρχοντα αὐτῷ περὶ τὸν κατὰ
δραχμῶν ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι καὶ τῶν ἑπομένων, ἐφʼ ᾧ κυρωθεῖσα διαγράψω ἐπὶ τὴν δημοσίαν τράπεζαν, μενεῖ δέ μοι ἡ τούτων κράτησις καὶ κυρεία ἀναφαίρετος ἐπὶ τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον, ἐὰν φαίνηται
πρόβατα τελεῖα ἀθάνατα … τετυχηκότα τῆς ἴσης ἐπιμελείας καὶ φροντίδος … ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι, μένοντός σοι … ὀφείλω φόρου μνῶν δύο — … ου Νείλου τοῦ καὶ Ἰσχυρίωνος
The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.
ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),
prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),
with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.
C. gen.,
of place, answering the question, where?
of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,
ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…
Read the full entry →ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…
Read the full entry →ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.
ἐπί,
Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
__A WITH GEN.:
__A.I of Place,
__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…
ἐπί
epi
a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,
place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive
case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,
etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,
etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as
(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a
place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf
of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),
with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,
etc. (literally or figuratively).
ἐπί
Prep.
on, to, against, on the basis of, at
ἐπί epi 890x
(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →
ἐπί
on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.
prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.
WITH GEN.:
of Place,
with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.
not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
On
Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…
(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…
See HELIOPOLIS.
pain; force; iniquity
907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.
ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ
καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης
ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
σταυρός refers to an upright stake or post, commonly understood as a cross, particularly in the context of crucifixion. It is used in the New Testament to denote the instrument of Christ's execution and metaphorically represents self-denial and the atonement associated with His death. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 27:32 and Philippians 2:8, and has implications for bearing one's own cross in a spiritual sense.
* σταυρός, -οῦ, ὁ
an upright pale or stake (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., al.)
In late writers (Diod., Plut., al.) of the Roman instrument of crucifixion, the Cross: of the Cross on which Christ suffered, Mt 27:32, 40, 42, Mk 15:21, 30, 32, Lk 23:26, Jo 19:17, 19, 25, 31, Col 2:14, He 12:2; θάνατος σταυροῦ, Phl 2:8; τ. αἷμα τοῦ σ., Col 1:20. Metaph., in proverbial sayings: αἴρειν (λαμβάνειν, βαστάζειν) τὸν σ., Mt 10:38 16:24, Mk 8:34 10:21, 15:21,
σταυρός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. ἵστημι (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro, Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius § 216; Vaniéek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed one, (Hom., Hdt., Thue., Xen.). 2. a cross; a. the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignominious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans from the Pheenicians; to it were affixed among the Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, robbers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and occasionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Kreuzigung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], 5. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409 864. [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. 8. vv. Cross, Crucifixion; O. Zéckler, Das Kreuz…
Read the full entry →σταυρός, ** cross. » The metaph. use of σταυρός in Lk 958, ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, finds an interesting illustration in a Christian prayer of ἵνίν a.D., P Oxy VII. τοςϑ3 6 O(€d)s τῶν παρακειμένων σταυρῶν, βοήθησον τὸν δοῦλόν σου Amdotay, “Ὁ God of the crosses that are laid upon us, help thy servant Apphouas’”’ (Ed.). ‘‘ God is apparently thought of as at once the sender and mitigator of trials” (Ed.). In P Lond 19178 (c. A.D. 330-40) the writer calls upon his correspondent—6rrws ἐφάρῃς τὰς χῖράς σίου πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην θαιὸν ὡς τοίπως σταυρῷ, “that you may lift up your hands to our Master God, in the semblance of a cross’’: see the editor's note and cf. 79. The sign of the cross is frequently prefixed to Christian letters, e.g. P Iand I. 16 (v/vi A.D.), and in the late P Lips I. 901° (Byz.) the scribe states that he has written the document for the original sender, but that…
Read the full entry →σταυρός (stauros) — cross.
σταυρός, ὁ,
upright pale or stake, σταυροὺς ἐκτὸς ἔλασσε διαμπερὲς ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα πυκνοὺς καὶ θαμέας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of piles driven in to serve as a foundation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. cross, as the instrument of crucifixion, [NT+1st c.BC+]; σ. λαμβάνειν, ἆραι, βαστάζειν, metaphorically of voluntary suffering, [NT]: its form was represented by the Greek letter T, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. b pale for impaling a corpse, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
σταυρός
stauros
from the base of 2476; a stake or post (as set upright), i.e.
(specially), a pole or cross (as an instrument of capital punishment);
figuratively, exposure to death, i.e. self-denial; by implication, the
atonement of Christ:--cross.
see GREEK for 2476
σταυρός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
a cross
σταυρός stauros 27x
a stake; a cross, Mt. 27:32, 40, 42; Phil. 2:8; by impl. the punishment of the cross, crucifixion, Eph. 2:16; Heb. 12:2; meton. the crucifixion of Christ in respect of its import, the doctrine of the cross, 1 Cor. 17:18; Gal. 5:11; 6:12, 14; met. to take up, or bear one’s cross, to be ready to encounter any extremity, Mt. 10:38; 16:24
σταυρός σταυρός, οῦ, ὁ, στῆναι an upright pale or stake, Hom., etc.: of piles driven in to serve as a foundation, Hdt., Thuc.
the Cross, NTest.: its form was represented by the Greek letter Τ, Luc.
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
(stauros, "a cross," "the crucifixion"; skolops, "a stake," "a pole"): The name is not found in the Old Testament. It is derived from the Latin word crux. In the Greek language it is stauros, but sometimes we find the word skolops used as its Greek equivalent. The historical writers, who transferred the events of Roman history into the Greek language, make use of these two words. No word in human language has become more universally known than this word, and that because all of the history of the world since the death of Christ has been measured by the distance which separates events from it. The symbol and principal content of the Christian religion and of Christian civilization is found in this one word.
1. Forms of the Cross:
The cross occurs in at least four different forms:
Cross
In the New Testament the instrument of crucifixion, and hence used for the crucifixion of Christ itself (Eph. 2:16; Heb. 12:2; 1 Cor. 1:17, 18; Gal. 5:11; 6:12, 14; Phil. 3:18). The word is also used to denote any severe affliction or trial (Matt. 10:38; 16:24; Mark 8:34; 10:21).
The forms in which the cross is represented are these:
1. The crux simplex (I), a “single piece without transom.”
2. The crux decussata (X), or St. Andrew’s cross.
3. The crux commissa (T), or St. Anthony’s cross.
As the emblem of a slave’s death and a murderer’s punishment, the cross was naturally looked upon with the profoundest horror. But after the celebrated vision of Constantine, he ordered his friends to make a cross of gold and gems, such as he had seen, and "the towering eagles resigned the flags unto the cross," and "the tree of cursing and shame" "sat upon the sceptres and was engraved and signed on the foreheads of kings." (Jer. Taylor, "Life of Christ," iii., xv. 1.) The new standards were called by the name Labarum, and may be seen on the coins of Constantine the Great and his nearer successors. The Latin cross on which our Lord suffered, was int he form of the letter T, and had an upright above the cross-bar, on which the "title" was placed. There was a projection from the central stem, on which the body of the sufferer rested. This was to prevent the weight of the body from…
A kind of gibbet made of pieces of wood placed transversely, whether crossing at right angles, one at the top of the other, T, or below the top, t, or diagonally, X. Death by the cross was a punishment of the meanest slaves, and was a mark of infamy, De 21:23 Ga 3:13. This punishment was so common among the Romans, that pains, afflictions, troubles, etc., were called "crosses." Our Savior says that his disciples must take up the cross and follow Him. Though the cross is the sign of ignominy and sufferings, yet it is the badge and glory of the Christian.
The common way of crucifying was by fastening the criminal with nails, one through each hand, and one through both his feet, or through each foot. Sometimes they were bound with cords, which, though it seems gentler, because it…
28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
τῶν δ’ ὡς ἀληθῶς πεπονθότων φίλοι καὶ συγγενεῖς, ὅτι μόνον ταῖς τῶν προσηκόντων συμφοραῖς συνήλγησαν, ἀπήγοντο, ἐμαστιγοῦντο, ἐτροχίζοντο, καὶ μετὰ πάσας τὰς αἰκίας, ὅσας ἐδύνατο χωρῆσαι τὰ σώματα αὐτοῖς, ἡ τελευταία καὶ ἔφεδρος τιμωρία σταυρὸς ἦν.
Σαβουχάδας δὲ τῶν εὐνούχων εἷς ἰδὼν τὸν σταυρὸν ἐν τῇ Ἀμάνου οἰκίᾳ πεπηγότα, ὃν ἐπὶ Μαρδοχαῖον παρεσκευάκεισαν, καὶ πυθόμενος παρά τινος τῶν οἰκετῶν, ἐπὶ τίνα τοῦτον ἦσαν ἑτοιμασάμενοι, γνούς, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς βασιλίσσης θεῖον, τὸν γὰρ Ἀμάνην μέλλειν…
Τίνα δὲ δοκεῖτε τύπον εἶναι, ὅτι ἐντέταλται τῷ Ἰσραὴλ προσφέρειν δάμαλιν τοὺς ἄνδρας, ἐν οἷς εἰσὶν ἁμαρτίαι τέλειαι, καὶ σφάξαντας κατακαίειν, καὶ αἴρειν τότε τὴν σποδὸν παιδία καὶ βάλλειν εἰς ἄγγη καὶ περιτιθέναι τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον ἐπὶ ξύλον ʽἴδε…
Γάιος Οὐιτράσιος Πωλίων λέγει· ἐὰν μὴ ἔρχηται εἰς τὸν Χινετε Ἀπίων τὸν Χινετο σταυρῶ τινεαιος κα … ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ τί γὰρ ταῦτα; τὸν Χινετο τὸν Λευκᾶς τὴν
παρὰ κυρίῳ θεῷ, ὅπως ἐπάρῃς τὰς χεῖράς σου πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην θεὸν ὡς τύτος σταυροῦ … … … … ζια θεῷ μεμελημένος διὰ ἐμοῦ τοῦ ταπεινοῦ καὶ ταλαιπώρου, καὶ
κτῆμα τῆς κέλλης. σταυρὸς α ἡμισπ χρ vestiges χμ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NPN — Article · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
T-NPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word σῶμα (lemma: sōma) means 'body' and can refer to both living and dead bodies, as well as the concept of a person or material substance. In the New Testament, it is used to describe the human body, the Church as the body of Christ, and even inanimate objects. The term contrasts with πνεῦμα (spirit) and ψυχή (soul), highlighting its physical nature.
σῶμα, -τος, τό, (appar. fr. σῶς ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius § 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, ef. Vaniéek p. 1055; Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for “3, "3, etc.; nba3 (a corpse), also for Chald. BW2; α body; and 1. the body both of men and of animals (on the distinction between it and σάρξ see σάρξ, esp. 2 init.; (cf. Dickson, St. Paul's use of ‘ Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]); a. as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body δέμας) and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG; (Mk. xv. 45 R G];, Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; τὸ σ. τινος, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52,55; Jn. xix. 38, 40; xx. 12; Jude 9; οὗ the body of an animal offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14; Num. xix. 3). b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living body : —of animals, Jas. iii. 3;—of man: τὸ σῶμα, absol.…
Read the full entry →σῶμα, “ἐᾷ body” (1) properly of the human body (a) cf. P Cairo Zen I. 5903429 (B.c. 257) peta τῆς τοῦ σώματος ὑγιείας, and the common salutation, as in 24. 590369 (B.c. 257), εἰ τῶι τε σώματι Eppwoat καὶ τἄλλα σοι κατὰ γνώμη[ν] ἐστίν, εἴη ἂν ὡς ἡμεῖς θέλομεν. See also BGU IV. 120848 (B.c. 27-26) τὰ δὲ] ἄλλα χαριεῖ τοῦ σώμαί( τος) [ἐπι μείλόμενος) ty’ ὑγιένῃς, ὃ δὴ μέγιστον ἡγοῦμίαι, PSI VII. 8ογ33 (a.p. 280) where a prisoner petitions ἔχειν τὸ σῶμα ἐλεύθερον καὶ ἀνύβριστον, and the magic P Lond 121°89 (jji/A.D.) (=I. p. 103) διαφύλασσέ pov τὸ σῶμα τὴν ψυχὴν ὁλόκληρον. Cf. Aristeas 139 ἁγνοὶ καθεστῶτες κατὰ σῶμα καὶ κατὰ ψυχήν. The tripartite division of I Thess 559 is found in P Oxy VIII. 1161° (iv/a.p.), where the writer (a Christian) prays to our God and the gracious Saviour and His beloved Son, ὅπως οὗτοι πάντες β[ο]ηθήσωσιν ἡμῶν τῷ σώματι, τῇ ψυχῇ, τῴ... πν(εύματι). For the…
Read the full entry →σῶμα (sōma) — body.
σῶμα, ατος, τό
[Refs 4th c.AD+] dative plural σωμάτεσι [Refs 3rd c.BC+], body of man or beast, but in [Refs 8th c.BC+], always dead body, corpse (whereas the living body is δέμας), ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη μεγάλῳ ἐπὶ σώματι κύρσας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ς. δὲ οἴκαδ᾽ ἐμὸν δόμεναι πάλιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so also in [NT+8th c.BC+]; νεκρὸν σ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; μέγιστον σ... σποδου, ={σ. μέγιστον ὃ νῦν σποδός ἐστι}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. the living body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γενναῖος τῷ σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὔρωστος τὸ σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ σ. σῴζειν or -εσθαι save one's life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; διασῴζειν or -εσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ τοῦ σ. ἀγωνίζεσθαι for one's life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχειν τὸ σ. κακῶς, ὡς βέλτιστα, etc., to be…
σῶμα
soma
from 4982; the body (as a sound whole), used in a very wide
application, literally or figuratively:--bodily, body, slave.
see GREEK for 4982
σῶμα, ατος, τό
n.n.
body, flesh
σῶμα sōma 142x
the body of an animal; a living body, Mt. 5:29, 30; 6:22, 23, 25; Jas. 3:3; a person, individual, 1 Cor. 6:16; a dead body; corpse, carcass, Mt. 14:12; 27:52, 58; Heb. 13:11; the human body considered as the seat and occasion of moral imperfection, as inducing to sin through its appetites and passions, Rom. 7:24; 8:13; genr. a body, a material substance, 1 Cor. 15:37, 38, 40; the substance, reality, as opposed to ἡ σκιά, Col. 2:17; in NT…
Read the full entry →σῶμα σῶμα, ατος, τό, deriv. uncertain the body of a man: in Hom. always the dead body, corpse, carcase, whereas the living body is δέμας.
the living body, Hes., Hdt., attic; τὸ ς. σώζειν or -εσθαι to save one's life, Dem., Thuc.; ἔχειν τὸ ς. κακῶς, ὡς βέλτιστα, to be in a bad, a good state of body, Xen.
body, as opp. to the soul (ψυχή), Plat., etc.; τὰ τοῦ ς. ἔργα bodily labours, Xen.; τὰ εἰς τὸ ς. τιμήματα bodily punishments, Aeschin.
periphr., ἀνθρώπου σῶμα ῀ ἄνθρωπος, Hdt.; esp. in Trag., σῶμα θηρός ῀ ὁ θήρ, Soph., etc.:—often of slaves, ς. αἰχμάλωτα Dem., etc
generally, a body, i. e. any material substance, Plat., etc.
Noun-NPN — Noun · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
N-NPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
144 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 142 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 50 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τοσούτῳ γὰρ τὸ νοητὸν τοῦ ὁρατοῦ λαμπρότερόν τε καὶ αὐγοειδέστερον ὅσῳπερ ἥλιος, οἶμαι, σκότους καὶ ἡμέρα νυκτὸς καὶ [τὰ κριτήρια] νοῦς, ὁ τῆς ὅλης ψυχῆς ἡγεμών, ὀφθαλμῶν σώματος.
οὐκ ἐπὶ νουθεσίᾳ δὲ τὴν κόλασιν ἔλαβεν, ἀλλʼ ἐπʼ αὐξήσει τῆς κακίας, ἡδονὴν μὲν πᾶσαν ἐκπορίζων αὐτοῦ τῷ σώματι, κἂν μεθʼ ὕβρεως τῶν συνόντων δέῃ ταύτην ἔχειν·
διὰ ζῆλος διωχθεῖσαι γυναῖκες Δαναΐδες καὶ Δίρκαι, αἰκίσματα δεινὰ καὶ ἀνόσια παθοῦσαι, ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς πίστεως βέβαιον δρόμον κατήντησαν καὶ ἔλαβον γέρας γενναῖον αἱ ἀσθενεῖς τῷ σώματι.
τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα
τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς
ἐγγαίων ὄντων δ ἔν τε τῶι Περιθήβας καὶ Παθυρίτηι, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κόχλακος τῆς Ἀραβίας τοῦ δηλουμένου Παθυρίτου νομοῦ μέρους ἡμίσους
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
On
Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…
(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…
See HELIOPOLIS.
pain; force; iniquity
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word σάββατον (transliterated as sabbaton) refers to the Sabbath, the seventh day of the week observed as a day of rest. It can also denote a week or a period of seven days. The New Testament frequently uses it in both singular and plural forms, often in relation to Jewish practices and regulations surrounding the Sabbath.
† σάββατον, -ου, τό (Aram. שַׁבָּתָא, transliterated σάββατα, and this being mistaken for a pl., the sing. σάββατον was formed from it), and σάββατα, -ων, τά
[in LXX for שַׁבָּת, שַׁבָּתוֹן ;]
the seventh day of the week, the sabbath
σάββατον, -ov, τό, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.T. only in the historical bks. exe. twice in Paul’s Epp. ; sabbath; i. 6. 1. the seventh day of each week, which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13 544. ; Deut. v.14); a. sing. σάββατὸν and τὸ σάβBarov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 421, ΤΥ]; xvi. 1; Jn. v. 9 sq., ete. ; i. q.the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy every seventh day of the week: Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27 sq.; Lk. vi. 5; λύειν, Jn. v. 18; τηρεῖν, Jn. ix. 16; ἡ ἡμέρα Tod σαββάτου (ΓΞ ΤΙ OF, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; ὁδὸς σαββάτου, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is lawful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e. ace. to the Talmud two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer. 66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, οἵ. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the…
Read the full entry →σάββατον to denote the Heb. Saééazh is first found in the LXX. In the Pentateuch and elsewhere the plur. τὰ σάββατα is used both for ‘‘the Sabbath” and ‘the sabbaths”: see Thackeray Gv. i. p. 35. In the LXX the dat. plur. is usually σαββάτοις, but in the critical text of the NT the form σάββασι occurs frequently: cf. πρόβασι for προβάτοις in P Lond 11718 (Β.6. 8) (= III. p. 178), and similar Part VII. exx. in Psaltes Gr. p. 176. For the significance of the added clause μηδὲ σαββάτῳ in Mt 2450 see Boll Ofenbarung p- 134, n.4 σαγήνη; a large “" drag-net ’’ (Mt 1317) as distinguished from the smaller circular ἀμφίβληστρον (cf. Mk 11°), often identified with the gaz/, which is generally worked by two boats (cf. Lk 57), which separate and then draw it in a sweep to the shore. It was consequently an expensive piece of machinery, and has been taken as evidence that some at least of the…
Read the full entry →σάββατον (sabbaton) — Sabbath.
Σάββᾰτ-ον, τό,
the Hebrew [Refs] (δηλοῖ δὲ ἀνάπαυσιν.. τὸ ὄνομα [NT+1st c.AD+]: frequently in plural of the single day, [NT+3rd c.BC+]; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σ. [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+], frequently with variant{σαββάτοις}; but σάββασι is certain in [Refs 1st c.BC+]
2. period of seven days, week, εἰς μίαν σαββάτων toward the first day of the week, [NT]; τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σ[NT]; δὶς τοῦ σ. [NT]
3. Σαβάτ, the [LXX]
σάββατον
sabbaton
of Hebrew origin (7676); the Sabbath (i.e. Shabbath), or day of weekly
repose from secular avocations (also the observance or institution
itself); by extension, a se'nnight, i.e. the interval between two
Sabbaths; likewise the plural in all the above applications:--sabbath
(day), week.
see HEBREW for 07676
σάββατον, ου, τό
n.n.
the Sabbath, a week
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
sab'-ath (shabbath, shabbathon; sabbaton, ta sabbata; the root shabhath in Hebrew means "to desist," "cease," "rest"):
I. ORIGIN OF THE SABBATH
1. The Biblical Account
2. Critical Theories
II. HISTORY OF THE SABBATH AFTER MOSES
1. In the Old Testament
2. In the Inter-Testamental Period
3. Jesus and the Sabbath
4. Paul and the Sabbath
LITERATURE
The Sabbath was the day on which man was to leave off his secular labors and keep a day holy to Yahweh.
I. Origin of the Sabbath.
1. The Biblical Account:
The sketch of creation in Ge 1:1-2:3 closes with an impressive account of the hallowing of the 7th day, because on it God rested from all the work which He had made creatively. The word "Sabbath" does not occur in the story; but it is recognized by critics of every school that the author (P) means to describe the Sabbath as primeval. In
Sabbath
(Heb. verb shabbath, meaning “to rest from labour”), the day of rest. It is first mentioned as having been instituted in Paradise, when man was in innocence (Gen. 2:2). “The sabbath was made for man,” as a day of rest and refreshment for the body and of blessing to the soul.
It is next referred to in connection with the gift of manna to the children of Israel in the wilderness (Ex. 16:23); and afterwards, when the law was given from Sinai (20:11), the people were solemnly charged to “remember the sabbath day, to keep it holy.” Thus it is spoken of as an institution already existing.
In the Mosaic law strict regulations were laid down regarding its observance (Ex. 35:2, 3;
(shabbath), "a day of rest," from shabath "to cease to do to," "to rest"). The name is applied to divers great festivals, but principally and usually to the seventh day of the week, the strict observance of which is enforced not merely in the general Mosaic code, but in the Decalogue itself. The consecration of the Sabbath was coeval with the creation. The first scriptural notice of it, though it is not mentioned by name, is to be found in (Genesis 2:3) at the close of the record of the six-days creation. There are not wanting indirect evidences of its observance, as the intervals between Noah’s sending forth the birds out of the ark, an act naturally associated with the weekly service, (Genesis 8:7-12) and in the week of a wedding celebration, (
Rest. God having created the world in six days, "rested" on the seventh, Ge 2:2,3; that is, he ceased from producing new beings in this creation; and because he had rested on it, he "blessed" or sanctified it, and appointed it in a peculiar manner for his worship.
We here have an account of the ORIGINAL INSTITUTION of the day of rest. Like the institution of marriage, it was given to man for the whole race. Those who worshipped God seem to have kept the Sabbath from the first, and there are tokens of this in the brief sketch the Bible contains of the ages before the giving of the law at Mount Sinai. Noah sent forth the raven from the ark, and the dove thrice, at intervals of seven days, Ge 8:1-22. The account of the sending of manna in the desert proves that the Sabbath was already…
68 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 74 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„καὶ ἔσται τὰ σάββατα τῆς γῆς ὑμῖν βρώματα“ (Lev.
καὶ τὸν κόσμον ἓξ ταῖς πάσαις ἡμέραις Μωυσῆς καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ φησὶ γενέσθαι, τῇ δὲ ἑβδόμῃ ἀναπαύσασθαι καὶ λαβεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων ἐκεχειρίαν, ὅθεν καὶ ἡμεῖς σχολὴν ἀπὸ τῶν πόνων κατὰ ταύτην ἄγομεν τὴν ἡμέραν προσαγορεύοντες αὐτὴν σάββατα·
ἐὰν φέρητε σεμίδαλιν, μάταιον: θυμίαμα βδέλυγμά μοί ἐστιν: τὰς νεομηνίας ὑμῶν καὶ τὰ σάββατα οὐκ ἀνέχομαι.
r,1 Ἐπείφ ε ἔχω πλίνθον τῆς παρὰ Φιλέα ϡκ ϛ Α ζ Σάββατα η Α θ Α ι Β ταύτης Δημήτριος ἦγεν Α τὰ ἐκ Τάνιος Α
ἡμῖν Παυσανίας παρὰ σοῦ χρηματισμόν, παρεσόμεθα … … διὰ τὸ τὴν ἀνὰ μέσον σάββατον εἶναι. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν … … … ἵν’ ὑγιαίνῃς. ἔρρωσο
ὅρκους ἔκρυψεν πάλιν ἐμὲ τὰς κλεῖς εἰς ἐμέ. καὶ ἀπελθοῦσα εἰς τὸ κυριακὸν ἐν σαββάτῳ, καὶ ἐποίησεν τὰς ἔξω θύρας αὐτοῦ ἐγκλεισθῆναι ἐπάνω μου λέγων ὅτι διὰ τί ἀπῆλθας
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singularimperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
The Greek word γάρ (gar) is a coordinating particle primarily used to introduce reasons or explanations, similar to 'for' in English. It can serve various functions, including causal, explicative, and conclusive, and is often placed after the first word in a clause. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts that clarify or justify preceding statements, aligning with its classical usage.
γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ and dpa (i. 4. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirmation and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily as the case stands, “ the thing is first aflirmed by the particle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 232; οἵ. Kiihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415) sq-]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently the reason and nature of something previously mentioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use of this particle, either the reason and cause of a foregoing statement is added, whence arises the causal or argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is explained, whence γάρ takes on an ex plicative force: YP Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmilich). Thus the force of the…
Read the full entry →γάρ (gar) — for.
γάρ
(γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles.
I. introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα.. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs]
I. b in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον.. ὁ Ζεὺς γ... [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι.. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ…
γάρ
gar
a primary particle; properly, assigning a reason (used in argument,
explanation or intensification; often with other particles):--and, as,
because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then,
therefore, verily, what, why, yet.
γάρ
Cj.
for
γάρ for, Lat. enim, and like it, regularly placed after the first word of a sentence: to introduce the reason:
ARGUMENTATIVE, to introduce the reason for a statement, which usually precedes:—when it precedes the statement, it may be rendered since, as, Ἀτρείδη, πολλοὶ γὰρ τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί, χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι Il.
the statement of which γάρ gives the reason may be omitted, οὐ γάρ τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc., Soph.; ἔστι γὰρ οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly, Plat.; οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί: τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, Eur.: —in Conditional Propositions, where the Condition is omitted, it may be transl. for otherwise, else, οὐ γὰρ ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν, (sc. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον)…
Read the full entry →Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.
In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…
1,083 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,038 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
1 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ δυνάμεων ἱκανῶν πρὸς τὸ καταστεῖλαι τοὺς ἐν
ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος
ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ τῶν ἐπάνω
μέγας is an adjective meaning 'great' or 'large,' used to describe size, intensity, or importance. It can refer to physical dimensions, such as a stone or city, or to abstract qualities like love or fear. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Matthew 2:10 and Revelation 11:8. The word has comparative and superlative forms: μείζων (greater) and μέγιστος (greatest).
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [(τοϊαϊοα to Lat. magnus, ADEE Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον), etc.; Vaniéek p. 682; Cur tius ὃ 462)], ace. μέγαν. μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. pokes ται, -a; comp. μείζων, -ον, (acc. πιᾶξο. and fem. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pectorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the compar. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ὮΥΤΔ; also for 31; great; 1. predicated a. of the external form or sensible appearance of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, Rey. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3,9; ἀετός, ibid. 14; δένδρον…
Read the full entry →μέγας (B.C. 112) (= Selections, p. 30) μεγαλοίυϊπρεπέστερον ἐγδεχθήτωι, ‘let him be received with special magnificence ” (Edd.), PSI V. 4818 (v/vi a.p.) Tavptvyos ὃ μεγαλοπρεπέστί(ατος), and P Amh II. 154° (vi/vii A.D.) τοῦ peyadoπρε(πεστάτου) χαρτουλαρίου, ‘the most magnificent secretary.” For the subst. as a title of address cf. P Oxy VIII. 1163* (v/a.D.) ἐρωτηθὶς παρὰ τῆς αὐτοῦ μεγαλοπρεπίας ὅσα ἐχρῆν ἀνεδίδαξα αὐ τ]ὸν περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας μεγαλο| πρεπίας, ‘Son the inquiry of his magnificence I told him what was fitting about your magnificence,” 76. I. 155° (vi/A.D.) ἐπειδὴ αἱ προσκυνοῦσαι τὴν ὑμετέραν μεγαλοπρί(έπειαν) καὶ τὰ παιδία ἀρρωστοῦσιν, ὡς ἔθος ἔχει τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος χαρίζεσθαί μου τοῦ λογαρίου, ‘since your magnificence’s obedient servants and their children are ill, I hope your highness will excuse my account” (Edd.). | , μεγαλύνω. With the use of this verb in the pass. in Phil…
Read the full entry →μέγας (megas) — great.
μέγᾰς, μεγάλη [ᾰ], μέγα [ᾰ],
genitive μεγάλου, ης, ου, dative μεγάλῳ, ῃ, ῳ, accusative μέγᾰν, μεγάλην, μέγα [ᾰ]; dual μεγάλω, α, w; plural μεγάλοι, μεγάλαι, μεγάλα, etc.: the stem μεγάλο- is never used in singular nominative and accusative masculine and neuter, and only once in vocative masculine,
__A ὦ μεγάλε Ζεῦ [Refs 4th c.BC+]
__A.I big, of bodily size: frequently of stature, εἶδος.. μ. ἦν ὁράασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φῶτα μέγαν καὶ καλόν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φύσιν τίν᾽ εἶχε φράζ; Answ. μέγας [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.b full-grown, of age as shown by stature, νῦν δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ μ. εἰμί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, elder of two persons of the same name, Wilcken [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Σκιπίων ὁ…
μέγας
megas
(including the prolonged forms, feminine megale, plural
megaloi, etc.; compare also 3176, 3187); big (literally or
figuratively, in a very wide application):--(+ fear) exceedingly,
great(-est), high, large, loud, mighty, + (be) sore (afraid), strong,
X to years.
see GREEK for 3176
see GREEK for 3187
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα
Adj. & Comp.adv.
large, great
μέγας megas 243x
great, large in size, Mt. 27:60; Mk. 4:32; great, much, numerous, Mk. 5:11; Heb. 11:26; great, grown up, adult, Heb. 11:24; great, vehement, intense, Mt. 2:10; 28:8; great, sumptuous, Lk. 5:29; great, important, weighty, of high importance, 1 Cor. 9:11; 13:13; great, splendid, magnificent, Rev. 15:3; extraordinary, wonderful, 2 Cor.…
Read the full entry →μέγας Radic. sense, opp. to μικρός, σμικρός, big, great, of men's stature, tall, Hom.; of women, καλή τε μεγάλη τε Od.:—also, great, full-grown, of age as shewn by stature, id. Od., Aesch.
vast, high, οὐρανός, ὄρος, πύργος Hom.
vast, spacious, wide, πέλαγός, αἰγιαλός, etc., id. Hom.
of Degree, great, strong, mighty, of gods, id. Hom., etc.; μεγάλα θεά, of Demeter and Proserpine, Soph.; μέγας ηὐξήθη rose to greatness, Dem.; βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας, i. e. the King of Persia, le grand monarque, Hdt.; βασιλεὺς μέγας Aesch.; ὁ μ. ἐπικληθεὶς Ἀντίοχος the Great, Polyb.
great, strong, violent, etc., ἄνεμος, λαῖλαψ Hom.; of properties, passions, etc., id. Hom., etc.
Adj-NSF — Adjective · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-NSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
246 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 243 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 340 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.
ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ θεοῦ Φιλοπάτορος Νέου καὶ θεοῦ Εὐεργέτου καὶ θεῶν Φιλομητόρων Σωτήρων, ἱεροῦ πώλου Ἴσιδος μεγάλης μητρὸς θεῶν, ἀθλοφόρου Βερενίκης Εὐεργέτιδος, κανηφόρου Ἀρσινόης Φιλαδέλφου, ἱερείας Ἀρσινόης Φιλοπάτορος τῶν ὄντων ἐν
μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης βιαιότερον ἐμβατεύσας εἰς τὸ δηλούμενον ἔδαφος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος καὶ εἰς τὰ συνκύροντα τούτωι ἐν
μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ἡμέρα is a feminine noun meaning 'day,' covering various usages from the natural day (sunrise to sunset) to a full 24-hour period. It appears in contexts contrasting day with night, as well as in metaphorical senses related to time and judgment. The New Testament references include specific phrases like 'by day' and 'every day,' with notable occurrences in Matthew and Revelation.
ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם;]
day;
ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, (fr. ἥμερος, -ον, prop. ἡμέρα ὥρα the mild time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.; Vanitek p. 9487); Hebr. ny; day; used 1. of the natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sunset, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a. prop. ἡμέρας, by day, in the daytime, [ef. collog. Eng. of a day; W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ἡμέpas k. νυκτός, day and night [ef. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v.5; Lk. xvili. 7; Actsix. 24; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii.8 L txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. v.5; 2 Tim.i.3; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx.10; ἡμέρας μέσης, at midday, Acts xxvi. 13; νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν [ W. 230 (216); B.§ 131, 11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx. 31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyperbolically i. q. without intermission, λατρεύειν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xxvi. 7; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxxi.…
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα. P Par 133} (8.6. 117) ἡμέρας, “during the day,” 7d. 275} (B.C. 160) τῆς ἡμέρας, ‘‘every day,” 23. 497° (B.c. 164-158) τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην ἀσχοληθείς, P Tebt I. 17° (B.c. 114) ἅμ᾽ ἡμέραι, ‘‘at daybreak,” P Giss I. 1710 (time of Hadrian) καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, P Oxy VII. 10296 (A.D. 107) els τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν, 74. τοῦ814 (iii/A.D.) ἡμερῶν ἀνοχὴν ἔχω, 26. X. 127513 (iii/A.D.) ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρας ἑορτῶν πέντε. In P Giss I. 197 (ii/A.D.) a wile writes to her husband—ovv]exas ἀγρυπνοῦσα γυκτὸς ἡϊμέρας μ]ήίαν μέριμναν ἔχω τὴν περὶ [τῆς σωτ]ηρίας σου. The noun is used of ¢ime generally, as in Jn 14°°, Ac 933 a/., in P Amh II. 304° (ii/B.c.) where a woman, who has been ordered to vacate a house, asks ‘‘ for time’”’—‘pépas αἰτοῦσα, promising that she will quit—ev ἡ[μ]έραις 4, “ within ten days.’ For the parenthetic nominative of time, as Mt 1532, Mk 85, Lk 928, we may perhaps cite P Lond 417} (c. A.D. 346)…
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα (hēmera) — day.
ἡμέρα,
Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἡμέρη [Refs], Doric dialect ἀμέρα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Locrian dialect ἀμάρα [Refs] (aspirated perhaps only in Attic dialect and West Ionic dialect, compare ἐπάμερος [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; usually unaspirated in early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs]; aspirated in codices even in dialects: original ἀμέρα probably took aspirate from ἑσπέρα): ἡ:—day, less frequently than ἦμαρ in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς νύ μοι ἡ. ἥδ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μῆνές τε καὶ ἡ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡ σήμερον ἡ., see at {σήμερον· ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ} or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ. διέλαμψεν, ἐξέλαμψεν, ὑπέφαινε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ἡ. ὀψέ late in the day, [Refs]
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα
hemera
feminine (with 5610 implied) of a derivative of hemai (to sit; akin to
the base of 1476) meaning tame, i.e. gentle; day, i.e. (literally) the
time space between dawn and dark, or the whole 24 hours (but several
days were usually reckoned by the Jews as inclusive of the parts of
both extremes); figuratively, a period (always defined more or less
clearly by the context):--age, + alway, (mid-)day (by day, (-ly)), +
for ever, judgment, (day) time, while, years.
see GREEK for 5610
see GREEK for 1476
ἡμέρα, ας, ἡ
n.f.
a day
ἡμέρα hēmera 389x
day, a day, the interval from sunrise to sunset, opp. to νύξ, Mt. 4:2; 12:40; Lk. 2:44; the interval of twenty-four hours, comprehending day and night, Mt. 6:34; 15:32; from the Hebrew, ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ, day by day, every day, 2 Cor. 4:16; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, continually, 2 Pet. 2:8; καθ’ ἡμέραν, every day, daily, Acts 17:17; Heb. 3:13; a point or period of time, Lk. 19:42; Read the full entry →
ἡμέρα day, Hom., etc.:—phrases for day-break, ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ Xen.; ἡμ. διαλάμπει or ἐκλάμπει Ar.; ἡμ. ὑποφαίνεται Xen.; γίγνεται or ἐστὶ πρὸς ἡμέραν id. Xen.
with Adjs. to describe a state or time of life, ἐπίπονος ἡμ. a life of misery, Soph.; λυπρὰν ἄγειν ἡμ. Eur.; αἱ μακραὶ ἡμέραι length of days, Soph.; νέα ἡμ. youth, Eur.
poet. for time, ἡμ. κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια Soph.
absol. usages,
in gen., τριῶν ἡμερέων within three days, Hdt.; ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων within a few days, Thuc.: —also, ἡμέρας by day, Plat.; δὶς τῆς ἡμέρης ἑκάστης twice every day, Hdt.
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
da (yom; hemera): This common word has caused some trouble to plain readers, because they have not noticed that the word is used in several different senses in the English Bible. When the different uses of the word are understood the difficulty of interpretation vanishes. We note several different uses of the word:
(1) It sometimes means the time from daylight till dark. This popular meaning is easily discovered by the context, e. g. Ge 1:5; 8:22, etc. The marked periods of this daytime were morning, noon and night, as with us. See Ps 55:17. The early hours were sometimes called "the cool of the day" (Ge 3:8). After the exile the day. or daytime was divided into twelve hours and the night into twelve (see
Day
The Jews reckoned the day from sunset to sunset (Lev. 23:32). It was originally divided into three parts (Ps. 55:17). “The heat of the day” (1 Sam. 11:11; Neh. 7:3) was at our nine o’clock, and “the cool of the day” just before sunset (Gen. 3:8). Before the Captivity the Jews divided the night into three watches, (1) from sunset to midnight (Lam. 2:19); (2) from midnight till the cock-crowing (Judg. 7:19); and (3) from the cock-crowing till sunrise (Ex.…
The variable length of the natural day at different seasons led in the very earliest times to the adoption of the civil day (or one revolution of the sun) as a standard of time. The Hebrews reckoned the day from evening to evening, (Leviticus 23:32) deriving it from (Genesis 1:5) "the evening and the morning were the first day." The Jews are supposed, like the modern Arabs, to have adopted from an early period minute specifications of the parts of the natural day. Roughly, indeed, they were content to divide it into "morning, evening and noonday," (Psalms 55:17) but when they wished for greater accuracy they pointed to six unequal parts, each of which was again subdivided. These are held to have been -- "the dawn." "Sunrise."…
The day is distinguished into natural, civil, and artificial. The natural day is one revolution of the earth on its axis. The civil day is that, the beginning and the end of which are determined by the custom of any nation. The Hebrews began their day in the evening, Le 23:32; the Babylonians at sunrise; and we begin at midnight. The artificial day is the time of the sun’s continuance above the horizon, which is unequal according to different seasons, on account of the obliquity of the equator. The sacred writers generally divide the day into twelve hours. The sixth hour always ends at noon throughout the year; and the twelfth hour is the last hour before sunset. But in summer, all the hours of the day were longer than in winter, while those of night were shorter. See HOURS, and THREE.
392 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 389 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 1,082 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιουργηθῆναί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν — ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον —, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.
καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.
Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,
Πέρσαις τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως, χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα πέντε δραχμὰς δισχιλίας ἄτοκα εἰς ἡμέρας τριάκοντα ἀπὸ τοῦ Μεσορὴ τοῦ προκειμένου ἔτους. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι
μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος Πανᾶς Ἀγαθίνωι
ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα τὰ τοῦ σιδήρου μνᾶς δισχιλίας χμ καὶ ἐπίτιμον ἡμέρας ἑκάστης ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι τὸν σίδηρον χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς σ τῆς ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ
The Greek word ἐκεῖνος is a demonstrative pronoun meaning 'that one' or 'that person or thing,' often implying remoteness compared to οὗτος ('this'). It can be used absolutely or as an adjective with nouns, and it appears in various contexts throughout the New Testament, including Luke 18:14 and James 4:15. The lexicons note its use for emphasis and its contrast with nearby subjects.
ἐκεῖνος, -η, -ο
(< ἐκεῖ),
[in LXX chiefly for הַהוּא ,הוּא, and cogn. forms ;]
demonstr. pron.,
that person or thing (ille), implying remoteness as compared with οὗτος (hic);
absol., emphatic he, she, it: opp. to οὗτος, Lk 18:14, Ja 4:15; ἡμεῖς, He 12:25; ὑμεῖς, Mt 13:11, Mk 4:11; ἄλλοι, Jo 9:9; ἐγώ, Jo 3:30; to persons named, Mk 16:[10, 13, 20], Jo 2:21; of one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§2385, 2732), Jo 7:11 9:28; with respect, of Christ, I Jo 2:6 3:3, al.; referring to a
ἐκεῖνος, -7, -o, (fr. ἐκεῖ, prop. the one there, οἵ. Germ. dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing (Lat. ille, illa, illud); properly of persons, things, times, places somewhat remote from the speaker. 1. used absolutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote subject: opp. to οὗτος, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; ὑμῖν . . ἐκείνοις, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; ἐκεῖνοι - - . ἡμεῖς, Heb. xii. 25; ἄλλοι . . . ἄλλοι. . . ἐκεῖνος, Jn. 1x. 9; ἐκεῖvoy... ἐμέ, JN. iii. 30; οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι... ἐκεῖνος δέ, In. ii. 20 sq.; ὁ μὲν κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς [RG Τ' οπι. Ἰ. WH Tr mrg. br.] . .. ἐκεῖνοι δέ, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., ete. b. of noted persons (as in classic Grk.): in a bad sense, that notorious man, Jn. vii. 11; ix. 28; in a good sense, —of the Lord Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6; iii. 3, 5,7, 16; iv. 17; of the Holy Spirit, with an apposition added, ἐκεῖνος, τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας, Jn. xvi. 18. c.…
Read the full entry →ἐκεῖνος (ekeinos) — that.
ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο,
also κεῖνος (regular in Epic dialect, Ionic dialect (as [Refs 5th c.BC+] only where the metre requires,[Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; but not in Attic dialect Prose, and in Comedy texts only in mock Trag. passages): Aeolic dialect κῆνος [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Doric dialect τῆνος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: in Comedy texts, strengthened ἐκεινοσί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκεινοσίν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: (ἐκεῖ):—demonstrative pronoun the person there, that person or thing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally with reference to what has gone immediately before, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but when οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος refer to two things before mentioned, ἐκεῖνος, properly belongs to the more remote, in time, place, or thought, οὗτος to the nearer, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sometimes = the latter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἆρ᾽ οὗτός ἐστ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ὅν..; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also…
Read the full entry →ἐκεῖνος
ekeinos
from 1563; that one (or (neuter) thing); often intensified by the
article prefixed:--he, it, the other (same), selfsame, that (same,
very), X their, X them, they, this, those. See also 3778.
see GREEK for 1563
see GREEK for 3778
ἐκεῖνος, η, ο
Dem.pr.
that, that one there, yonder
ἐκεῖνος ekeinos 265x
demonstrative adjective or noun, that, this, he, etc., Mt. 17:27; 10:14; 2 Tim. 4:8; in contrast with οὗτος, referring to the former of two things previously mentioned, Lk. 18:14
ἐκεῖνος in attic strengthd. ἐκεινοσί ἐκεῖ Demonstr. Pron.: the person there, that person or thing, Hom., etc.: when οὗτος and ἐκεῖνος refer to two things before mentioned, ἐκεῖνος, ille, belongs to the more remote, i. e. the former, οὗτος, hic, to the nearer, i. e. the latter.
like ille, to denote well-known persons, ἐκεῖνος Θουκυδίδης Ar.
with demonstr. force, Ἶρος ἐκεῖνος ἧσται Irus sits there, Od.
in attic the Subst. with ἐκεῖνος properly has the Article, and ἐκεῖνος may precede or follow the Subst., ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ: when the Art. is omitted in Prose, ἐκεῖνος follows the Subst., νῆες ἐκεῖναι Thuc.
adv. ἐκείνως, in that way, in that case, id. Thuc.
dat. fem. ἐκείνῃ as adv.,
Dem-GSN — Demonstrative pronoun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
D-GSN Part of Speech: Demonstrative pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
256 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 244 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 348 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
αἰσθάνεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, μὴ ὄντες ἀσύνετοι, τὴν γνώμην τῆς ἀγαθωσύνης τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, ὅτ̓ ἡμῖν λέγει, θέλων ἡμᾶς μὴ ὁμοίως πλανωμένους ἐκείνοις ζητεῖν, πῶς προσάγωμεν αὐτῷ.
Σώστρατος παρεπιδημῶν, ὅτε ἐπὶ τὸν ὀπισμὸν ἀνέπλευσεν, ἐντυχὼν Διονυσίωι τῶι παρὰ Ζηνοδώρου ἐνεφάνισεν, καὶ ἐκεῖνος φοβηθεὶς ἀφῆκε τοὺς μελισσουργούς. ὁ δʼ αὐτὸς οὗτος καθʼ ὃν χρόνον μετὰ τοῦ βασιλέως
ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν ἔπιπλα τάς τε προκτήσεις τῶν ἐγγαιδίων ἐξιδιασάμενοι ἀπηνέγκαντο καὶ ἀπʼ ἐκείνου διὰ παρευρέσεως ἀεί ποτε ἀντιποιούμενοι τῶν ἡμετέρων παρʼ ἕκαστον καταβλάπτοντες διασείουσιν. ἐνήλικοι δὲ γενόμεναι
πάντων ὧν κεκράτηκεν ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν ἐφʼ ὅσον περιῆι χρόνον, ἡμῶν δὲ μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης βιαιότερον ἐμβατεύσας
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word σάββατον (transliterated as sabbaton) refers to the Sabbath, the seventh day of the week observed as a day of rest. It can also denote a week or a period of seven days. The New Testament frequently uses it in both singular and plural forms, often in relation to Jewish practices and regulations surrounding the Sabbath.
† σάββατον, -ου, τό (Aram. שַׁבָּתָא, transliterated σάββατα, and this being mistaken for a pl., the sing. σάββατον was formed from it), and σάββατα, -ων, τά
[in LXX for שַׁבָּת, שַׁבָּתוֹן ;]
the seventh day of the week, the sabbath
σάββατον, -ov, τό, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.T. only in the historical bks. exe. twice in Paul’s Epp. ; sabbath; i. 6. 1. the seventh day of each week, which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13 544. ; Deut. v.14); a. sing. σάββατὸν and τὸ σάβBarov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 421, ΤΥ]; xvi. 1; Jn. v. 9 sq., ete. ; i. q.the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy every seventh day of the week: Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27 sq.; Lk. vi. 5; λύειν, Jn. v. 18; τηρεῖν, Jn. ix. 16; ἡ ἡμέρα Tod σαββάτου (ΓΞ ΤΙ OF, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; ὁδὸς σαββάτου, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is lawful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e. ace. to the Talmud two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer. 66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, οἵ. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the…
Read the full entry →σάββατον to denote the Heb. Saééazh is first found in the LXX. In the Pentateuch and elsewhere the plur. τὰ σάββατα is used both for ‘‘the Sabbath” and ‘the sabbaths”: see Thackeray Gv. i. p. 35. In the LXX the dat. plur. is usually σαββάτοις, but in the critical text of the NT the form σάββασι occurs frequently: cf. πρόβασι for προβάτοις in P Lond 11718 (Β.6. 8) (= III. p. 178), and similar Part VII. exx. in Psaltes Gr. p. 176. For the significance of the added clause μηδὲ σαββάτῳ in Mt 2450 see Boll Ofenbarung p- 134, n.4 σαγήνη; a large “" drag-net ’’ (Mt 1317) as distinguished from the smaller circular ἀμφίβληστρον (cf. Mk 11°), often identified with the gaz/, which is generally worked by two boats (cf. Lk 57), which separate and then draw it in a sweep to the shore. It was consequently an expensive piece of machinery, and has been taken as evidence that some at least of the…
Read the full entry →σάββατον (sabbaton) — Sabbath.
Σάββᾰτ-ον, τό,
the Hebrew [Refs] (δηλοῖ δὲ ἀνάπαυσιν.. τὸ ὄνομα [NT+1st c.AD+]: frequently in plural of the single day, [NT+3rd c.BC+]; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σ. [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+], frequently with variant{σαββάτοις}; but σάββασι is certain in [Refs 1st c.BC+]
2. period of seven days, week, εἰς μίαν σαββάτων toward the first day of the week, [NT]; τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σ[NT]; δὶς τοῦ σ. [NT]
3. Σαβάτ, the [LXX]
σάββατον
sabbaton
of Hebrew origin (7676); the Sabbath (i.e. Shabbath), or day of weekly
repose from secular avocations (also the observance or institution
itself); by extension, a se'nnight, i.e. the interval between two
Sabbaths; likewise the plural in all the above applications:--sabbath
(day), week.
see HEBREW for 07676
σάββατον, ου, τό
n.n.
the Sabbath, a week
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
sab'-ath (shabbath, shabbathon; sabbaton, ta sabbata; the root shabhath in Hebrew means "to desist," "cease," "rest"):
I. ORIGIN OF THE SABBATH
1. The Biblical Account
2. Critical Theories
II. HISTORY OF THE SABBATH AFTER MOSES
1. In the Old Testament
2. In the Inter-Testamental Period
3. Jesus and the Sabbath
4. Paul and the Sabbath
LITERATURE
The Sabbath was the day on which man was to leave off his secular labors and keep a day holy to Yahweh.
I. Origin of the Sabbath.
1. The Biblical Account:
The sketch of creation in Ge 1:1-2:3 closes with an impressive account of the hallowing of the 7th day, because on it God rested from all the work which He had made creatively. The word "Sabbath" does not occur in the story; but it is recognized by critics of every school that the author (P) means to describe the Sabbath as primeval. In
Sabbath
(Heb. verb shabbath, meaning “to rest from labour”), the day of rest. It is first mentioned as having been instituted in Paradise, when man was in innocence (Gen. 2:2). “The sabbath was made for man,” as a day of rest and refreshment for the body and of blessing to the soul.
It is next referred to in connection with the gift of manna to the children of Israel in the wilderness (Ex. 16:23); and afterwards, when the law was given from Sinai (20:11), the people were solemnly charged to “remember the sabbath day, to keep it holy.” Thus it is spoken of as an institution already existing.
In the Mosaic law strict regulations were laid down regarding its observance (Ex. 35:2, 3;
(shabbath), "a day of rest," from shabath "to cease to do to," "to rest"). The name is applied to divers great festivals, but principally and usually to the seventh day of the week, the strict observance of which is enforced not merely in the general Mosaic code, but in the Decalogue itself. The consecration of the Sabbath was coeval with the creation. The first scriptural notice of it, though it is not mentioned by name, is to be found in (Genesis 2:3) at the close of the record of the six-days creation. There are not wanting indirect evidences of its observance, as the intervals between Noah’s sending forth the birds out of the ark, an act naturally associated with the weekly service, (Genesis 8:7-12) and in the week of a wedding celebration, (
Rest. God having created the world in six days, "rested" on the seventh, Ge 2:2,3; that is, he ceased from producing new beings in this creation; and because he had rested on it, he "blessed" or sanctified it, and appointed it in a peculiar manner for his worship.
We here have an account of the ORIGINAL INSTITUTION of the day of rest. Like the institution of marriage, it was given to man for the whole race. Those who worshipped God seem to have kept the Sabbath from the first, and there are tokens of this in the brief sketch the Bible contains of the ages before the giving of the law at Mount Sinai. Noah sent forth the raven from the ark, and the dove thrice, at intervals of seven days, Ge 8:1-22. The account of the sending of manna in the desert proves that the Sabbath was already…
68 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 74 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„καὶ ἔσται τὰ σάββατα τῆς γῆς ὑμῖν βρώματα“ (Lev.
καὶ τὸν κόσμον ἓξ ταῖς πάσαις ἡμέραις Μωυσῆς καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ φησὶ γενέσθαι, τῇ δὲ ἑβδόμῃ ἀναπαύσασθαι καὶ λαβεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων ἐκεχειρίαν, ὅθεν καὶ ἡμεῖς σχολὴν ἀπὸ τῶν πόνων κατὰ ταύτην ἄγομεν τὴν ἡμέραν προσαγορεύοντες αὐτὴν σάββατα·
ἐὰν φέρητε σεμίδαλιν, μάταιον: θυμίαμα βδέλυγμά μοί ἐστιν: τὰς νεομηνίας ὑμῶν καὶ τὰ σάββατα οὐκ ἀνέχομαι.
r,1 Ἐπείφ ε ἔχω πλίνθον τῆς παρὰ Φιλέα ϡκ ϛ Α ζ Σάββατα η Α θ Α ι Β ταύτης Δημήτριος ἦγεν Α τὰ ἐκ Τάνιος Α
ἡμῖν Παυσανίας παρὰ σοῦ χρηματισμόν, παρεσόμεθα … … διὰ τὸ τὴν ἀνὰ μέσον σάββατον εἶναι. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν … … … ἵν’ ὑγιαίνῃς. ἔρρωσο
ὅρκους ἔκρυψεν πάλιν ἐμὲ τὰς κλεῖς εἰς ἐμέ. καὶ ἀπελθοῦσα εἰς τὸ κυριακὸν ἐν σαββάτῳ, καὶ ἐποίησεν τὰς ἔξω θύρας αὐτοῦ ἐγκλεισθῆναι ἐπάνω μου λέγων ὅτι διὰ τί ἀπῆλθας
The Greek word ἐρωτάω (i.e., *erōtaō*) means to ask or question. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, often indicating a request or inquiry, as seen in verses like Luke 19:31 and John 14:16. The word can also imply a sense of beseeching or entreating, similar to αἰτέω (i.e., *aiteō*). There is a noted distinction between these two terms in their usage, particularly in John 16:23.
TueEse words are often rendered by our Translators as though they covered the same spaces of meaning, the one as the other; nor can we object to their rendering, in numerous instances, αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν alike by our English ‘to ask.’ Yet sometimes they have a little marred the perspicuity of their translation by not varying their word, where the original has shown them the way. For example, the obliteration at John xvi. 23 of the distinction between αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν might easily suggest a wrong interpretation of the verse,—as though its two clauses were in near connexion, and direct antithesis,—being indeed in none. In our Version we read: ‘In that day ye shall ask Me nothing [ἐμὲ οὐκ ἐρωτήσετε οὐδέν]. Verily, verily, I say unto you, Whatsoever ye shall ask [ὅσα dv αἰτήσητε) the Father in my name, He will give it you.” Now every one competent to judge is agreed, that “ ye shall ask” of…
Read the full entry →ἐρωτάω, -ῶ
[in LXX chiefly for שָׁאַל ;]
to ask, question (cl.): absol., Lk 19:31 22:68, Jo 8:7 c. acc pers., Jo 9:21 16:19, 30 18:21; seq. λέγων, Mt 16:13, Lk 23:3, Jo 1:19, 21 5:12 9:19 16:5; c. dupl. acc (WM, § 32, 4a), Mt 21:24, Mk 4:10, Lk 20:3, Jo 16:23 (M, Pr., 66n); c. acc pers., seq. περί, Lk 9:45, Jo 18:19.
ἐρωτάω, -ῶ, [(1πῇ. -τᾶν L T Tr, -τᾷν RG WH; 5661, 2)7; impf. 3 pers. plur. ἠρώτων and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH, Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) ἠρώτουν, cf. B. 44 (38); [W. 85 (82); Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Soph. Lex. p.41; WH. App. p. 166; Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252]; fut: ἐρωτήσω; 1 aor. ἠρώτησα; Sept. for Sxw; to ask, i. 6. 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down to question: absol., Lk. xxii. 68; Jn. viii. 7 [R]; τινά, Jn. ix. 21; xvi. 19, 30; [xviii. 21 where Rec. ézep.], ete.; with the addition of λέγων and the words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13; Lk. xix. 31 [om. λέγων; xxiii. 3 T Tr WH]; Jn.i. 19, 21; v.12; ix.19; xvi. 5; τινά τι [cf. W. § 32, 4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xx. 3; Jn. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2]; τινὰ περί τινος, Lk. ix. 45 [Lehm. ἐπερ.] ; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to ask i.e. to request, entreat, beg, beseech, after the Hebr. >xvi, in a sense very rare in prof. auth. (Joseph.…
Read the full entry →ἐρωτάω in the sense of ‘‘ask,” ‘‘ entreat,” is so amply vouched for in the Kow7 that it is quite unnecessary to bring in the influence of the Heb. Syw (Grimm): cf. eg. P Oxy II. 292! (c. A.D. Ζο)ἠρώτησα δὲ καὶ “Epplfajy τὸν ἀδελφὸν διὰ γραπτοῦ ἀνηγεῖϊ σθαί] σοι περὶ τούτου, P Ryl II. 2298 (A.p. 38) ἐρωτῶ σε ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου εὐθέως μοι πέϊμ)ψαι τὰς ἄλλας (ἀρτάβας) y, and from the inscrr. Sy// 3285 (B.c. 84) π]ρὸς ἐμὲ ἦλθ[εν Ely ᾿Απαμήᾳ ἠρώτησέν τε [ὅπως Av] ἐξουσlay αὐ[τ]ῷ [π]οιήσω ἐπὶ τοῦ συν βο]υλίο[υ (where see Dittenberger’s note). ᾿Ἑ!ρωτηθείς -- “being asked what your pleasure is’’ comes to mean ‘‘please,” e.g. P Oxy II. 269% (A.D. 57) ἐὰν δύνῃ ἐρωτηθεὶς ὄχλησον Διόσκορον, ‘if you can, please worry Dioscorus” (Edd.): cf. Abbott Jos. Gr. p. 468. For the conjunction with παρακαλῶ, as in 1 Th 41, cf. P Oxy II. 29428 (A.D. 22) ἐρωτῶ δέ σε καὶ παρακαλ[ῶ γράψει μοι ἀντιφώνησιν περὶ τῶν…
Read the full entry →ἐρωτάω (erōtaō) — to ask.
ἐρωτ-άω,
Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰρωτάω, contraction in [Refs 8th c.BC+] and best codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect ἠρώτων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect εἰρώτευν [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle -τεῦντας variant in [Refs]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist I ἠρώτησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἠρώτηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+] —used in _Attic dialect_ to supply the defective tenses of ἔρομαι:—ask, τινά τι something of one, ἅ μ᾽ εἰρωτᾷς [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, to be asked, τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. ἐ. τι ask about a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. ἐρώτημα to ask a question, [Refs]; τὰς πύστεις ἐρωτῶντες εἰ.. putting the question, whether.., [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, τὸ ἐρωτηθέν, τὸ ἐρωτώμενον ἀποκρίνασθαι, to answer the question, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive…
ἐρωτάω
erotao
apparently from 2046 (compare 2045); to interrogate; by implication,
to request:--ask, beseech, desire, intreat, pray. Compare 4441.
see GREEK for 2046
see GREEK for 2045
see GREEK for 4441
ἐρωτάω
v.
I ask, question, request
ἐρωτάω ἔρομαι to ask, τινά τι something of one, Od., Soph., etc.:—Pass. to be asked, τι Xen.
ἐρ. τι to ask about a thing, Aesch.:— Pass., τὸ ἐρωτηθέν, τὸ ἐρωτώμενον the question, Thuc., Xen.
to enquire of a person, question him, Od., Eur., etc.:—Pass. to be questioned, id. Eur.
= αἰτέω, to ask, i. e. to beg, solicit, NTest.
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · pluralaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
63 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 34 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 63 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὧν τὸ μὲν παρασκευάζουσιν αἱ χορηγίαι καὶ ἀφθονίαι τῶν πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν, τὸ δὲ ἡ θεωρία τῶν κατ’ οὐρανόν, ἀφ’ ἧς πληχθεὶς ὁ νοῦς ἔρωτα καὶ πόθον ἔσχε τῆς τούτων ἐπιστήμης·
ὁ δὲ φοβηθεὶς ἠρώτα τὴν Σάρραν, τίς τε εἴη καὶ τίνα τοῦτον ἐπάγοιτο, πυθόμενός τε τὴν ἀλήθειαν Ἅβραμον παρῃτεῖτο·
ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ ὑμᾶς ὡς εἶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὤν, ἰδίως δὲ καὶ πάντας ἀγαπῶν ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, προσέχειν νῦν ἑαυτοῖς καὶ μὴ ὁμοιοῦσθαί τισιν ἐπισωρεύοντας ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν λέγοντας, ὅτι ἡ διαθήκη ἐκείνων καὶ ἡμῶν.
ὁ ἐπίτροπος ἔγνωκε ὅτι ἔχει τ … … … … … ἐνέχυρον, ἄν σε ἐρωτήσῃ περὶ τῶν σιδηρίων α … … … ἀσφαλισθῆναι αὐτὰ καὶ οὐκ οἴδαμεν ποῦ κεῖται
Λυσιμάχῳ τῶι κωμογραμματεῖ. μνήσθητι ὡς ἐν τῷ Τριστόμῳ με ἐφιλοτιμοῦ σὺν ἐμοὶ μεῖναι. ἐρωτῶ σε ταχύτερον συσχεῖν τὸ πρᾶγμα ἵνα κδ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ ὁ Σωτήριχος ἀνθομολογήσηται περὶ
αὐτὸς δῷ ἑτέραν καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους μοι πέμψηι. ἐπεὶ οὖν ἔπεμψάς μοι ἀρτάβας γ ἐρωτῶ σε ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου εὐθέως μοι πέμψαι τὰς ἄλλας ἀρτάβας γ καὶ τὸ ὀψάριον,
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word Πιλᾶτος (transliterated as Pilatos) refers to Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor of Judea. It is of Latin origin and is used in the New Testament in several passages, including Matthew 27:2 and Mark 15:1. The entries note variations in spelling and accentuation, but they consistently identify Pilate as a significant historical figure involved in the trial of Jesus.
Πιλάτος, [L] Tr better Πιλᾶτος ([on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; cf. Chandler § 326; B. p- 6n.J]; W. § 6,1 m.), T WH incorrectly Πειλᾶτος [but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq.; WH. App. p. 155; and cf. εἰ» 4], (a Lat. name, i.q. ‘armed with a pilum or javelin,’ like Torquatus i. q. ‘adorned with the collar or neck-chain’; [so generally; but some would contract it from pileatus i. 6. ‘ wearing the felt cap’ (pileus), the badge of a manumitted slave; οἵ. Leyrer in Herzog as below; Plumptre in B. D. s. v. Pilate (note) ]), -ov, ὁ [on the use of the art. with the name οἵ. W. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judea and Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s.v.) call Pilate the sixth procurator, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had charge for a…
Read the full entry →Πειλᾶτος σε, φίλτατε, ἤδη ποτὲ πεῖσαι αὐτὸν τοῦ ἐλθεῖν. Cf. also P Oxy II. 2045} (A.D. 22) ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι εἱκανὸν ἕως ἐπὶ διαλογισμόν, ‘unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security for them until the inquiry.” The 2nd perf. πέποιθα c. dat., which is rare in Hellenistic prose, is found in BGU IV. 1141? (B.c. 14) πέποιθα yap ἐματῶι, fersuasé mht: cf. 2 Cor 107, Phil 144, Philem*4, In PSI V. 538? (iii/B.c.) the intrans. πέποιθα is construed c. gen., which the editor attributes to Tonic influence—érlotyt δὲ καὶ od διότι τοῦ ὀψωνίου πεποίθαμεν, ‘‘sai anche tu che sull’ ὀψώνιον facciamo assegnamento.” For the mid. or pass. ‘‘am persuaded,” we may cite P Petr II. r1(1)4 (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Selections, p. 7) ἐὰν yap σὺ παραγένηι, πέπεισμαι ῥαιδίως pe τῶι βασιλεῖ συσταθήσεσθαι, ‘for, if you come, I am sure that I shall easily be introduced to the…
Read the full entry →∏ιλᾶτος
Pilatos
of Latin origin; close-pressed, i.e. firm; Pilatus, a Roman:--Pilate.
Πιλᾶτος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
Pilate
Πιλᾶτος Pilatos 55x
Pilate, pr. name
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
(armed with a spear), Pontius. Pontius Pilate was the sixth Roman procurator of Judea, and under him our Lord worked, suffered and died, as we learn not only from Scripture, but from Tacitus (Ann. xv. 44). was appointed A.D. 25-6, in the twelfth year of Tiberius. His arbitrary administration nearly drove the Jews to insurrection on two or three occasions. One of his first acts was to remove the headquarters of the army from Caesarea to Jerusalem. The soldiers of course took with them their standards, bearing the image of the emperor, into the holy city. No previous governor had ventured on such an outrage. The people poured down in crowds to Caesarea, where the procurator was then residing, and besought him to remove the images. After five days of discussion he gave the signal to some concealed soldiers to surround the petitioners and put them to death unless they ceased to trouble him…
armed with a dart
55 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 55 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Πιλᾶτος ἦν τῶν ὑπάρχων ἐπίτροπος ἀποδεδειγμένος τῆς Ἰουδαίας·
ὡς Πόντιος Πιλᾶτος ἠθέλησε κρύφα εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα εἰσενέγκαι προτομὰς Καίσαρος, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὐ κατεδέξατο στασιάσας.
τὸ πιττάκιον ὡς πρόκειται. Φαῶφι κα ιγ ἰνδικτίονος Ἰακὼβ Ἀβρααμίου στοιχεῖ μοι ὡς πρόκειται. Πιλᾶτος Ἀπολλῶτος νομικὸς μαρτυρῶ ὁ καὶ σωματίσας
εἰρημένων νδ κερατίων ὥστε ἐμὲ ἀποκαταστῆσαι ὑμῖν τὸ γραμμάτιον ὑμῶν τῶν πεντήκοντα ἑνὸς νομισματίων. Πιλᾶτος Ἀπολλῶτος νομικὸς μαρτυρῶ τῷ ἐνταγίῳ ἀκούσας παρὰ Ἰωάννου τοῦ καὶ θεμένου.
The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.
ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…
Read the full entry →ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.
ἵνα,
adverb,
I. of Place,
I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
ἵνα
hina
probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the
demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose
or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,
(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3363
ἵνα
Cj.
in order that, so that
ἵνα Adverb,
of Place,
demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.
relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.
= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.
of circumstance, when, at which, Od.
Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:
with subj.,
after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.
after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.
after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.
with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…
ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον
vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ
ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους
The Greek word κατάγνυμι (katagnumi) means 'to break' or 'to shatter.' It is formed from the prefix κατά and a root meaning 'to break.' This term appears in the New Testament in contexts related to breaking or shattering, such as in Matthew 12:20 and John 19:31-33. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement about its meanings.
κατ-άγνυμι : fut. κατεάξω ; 1 aor. κατέαξα (impv. κάταξον, Deut. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. kareaynv, whence subjune. 3 pers. plur. κατεαγῶσιν ; 1 aor. κατεάχθην in Sept. Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 25; (on the syllabic augment of these forms οἵ. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., ef. i. p. 323 sq.; Matthiae i. p- 520 sq.; W. $12, 2; [Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118; Veitch 5. v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. lxxix.]) ; fr. Hom. down; to break: ri, Mt. xii. 20; Jn. xix. 31-33. [Syn. see Schmidt ch. 115, 5 and ef. ῥήγνυμι.}
κατάγνυμι. The curious forms κατεάξω, etc. (Blass Gr. p. 52, Radermacher Gy. p. 69f.) can now be illustrated from BGU III. go8*° (time of Trajan) karéatav ἐνίων οἰκιῶν τὰς θύρας, P Flor II. 1857 (A.D. 254) τὰ δὲ κανθήλεια (‘ pack-saddles”’) . κατεαγμένα kal ἄχρηστα : cf. 75. 1757 (A.D. 255) and Syll 588'° (c. B.c. 180) κατεαγότες. The subst. occurs dzs in connexion with a wound in the head, BGU II. 647125. (A.D. 130) ὑπὲρ τὸν ἀριστερὸν κρόταφον τῆς κεφαλῆς τραῦμα κατέαγμα ἐπὶ βάθους, ἐν ᾧ εὗρον μι[κρ]ὰ κατεάγματα Χ[.θ[ο]ν : cf. P Amh IT. 9319 (Α.Ὁ. 181) ἐὰν δέ τις ἐπισκευῆς ἢ ἀνοικοδομῆς ἢ καταιάγματος ξυλικῶν ἢ ἀργαλίων ὁμοίως ὄντων πρὸ (1. πρὸς) σὲ τὸν Στοτοῆτιν, “1 any repairs or rebuilding or breakage of wood-work or tools occur you, Stotoétis, shall be responsible’’ (Edd.). See also Moulton Gr. ii. § 83. 1. 3…
Read the full entry →κατάγνυμι (katagnumi) — to break.
κατ-άγνῡμι,
infinitive -ύναι [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καταγνύω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; late present κατάσσω, κατεάσσω (which see): future κατάξω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist κατέαξα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect κατῆξα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular subjunctive κατάξει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle κατάξας (Dobree for κατεάξας) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect optative καυάξαις ={καϝϝάξαις} for κατ-ϝάξαις, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, κατάγνῠμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect κατεάγνυτο [Refs 4th c.BC+]aorist 2 κατεάγην[Refs 5th c.BC+]subjunctive κατ-ᾱγῶ (contraction from κατᾰ-ϝᾰγ-) [Refs]; participle καταγείς [probably ᾱ] [Refs]: future καταγήσομαι[Refs].129: perfect κατέᾱγα, Ionic dialect κατέηγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle κατεαγώς, written κατειαγώς [Refs] Phoenix5.1: perfect passive κατέαγμαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: aorist 1 κατεάχθην [LXX]…
Read the full entry →κατάγνυμι
katagnumi
from 2596 and the base of 4486; to rend in pieces, i.e. crack
apart:--break.
see GREEK for 2596
see GREEK for 4486
κατάγνυμι
v.
I break in pieces
κατάγνυμι inf. -ύναι καταγνύω fut. κατάξω aor1 κατέαξα part. κατάξας Pass., aor2 κατεάγην opt. κατα_γείην perf. κατέα_γα ionic κατέηγα perf act in passive sense to break in pieces, shatter, shiver, crack, Hom., attic
to break up, weaken, enervate, Eur., Plat.
Pass. with perf. act. to be broken, δόρατα κατεηγότα Hdt.; κατεαγέναι or καταγῆναι τὴν κεφαλήν to have the head broken, Ar., etc.; c. gen., τῆς κεφαλῆς κατέαγε he has got a bit of his head broken, id. Ar.
Verb-2APS-3P — Verb · second aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · pluralsecond aorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2APS-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Plural
bro'-k'-n: Occurs both as past participle of the verb translated "to break" and as an adjective, the former use will be dealt with here only so far as verbs occur which are thus translated but do not present the non-participial forms. Such are: meroach = "bruised," "emasculated" (Le 21:20); chathath = "to frustrate," hence, "to break down" either by violence or by confusion and fear (1Sa 2:10; Jer 48:20,39); dakhah = "to collapse" (Ps 44:19; 51:8); ratsats = "to crack in pieces" "crush" (Ec 12:6); kathath = "to bruise or violently strike," "break in pieces" (Isa…
4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐπελθόντες σὺν τῷ τῆς κώμης ἀρχεφόδωι εἰς τὰς ὑπαρχούσας ἡμῖν ἐν τῆι κώμῃ οἰκίας κατέαξαν ἐνίων οἰκιῶν τὰς θύρας, ἐνίων δὲ καὶ τὰ ταμιεῖα ἐπὶ σφραγίδων ἐποιήσαντο ἐπιχειροῦντες ἀπαιτῆσαι
ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ … ἐν κώμῃ Καρανίδι … ἐπῆλθάν τινες τῇ νυκτὶ … τὰς θύρας κατέαξαν … μ … τι … … ἀπὸ κέλλης … … ἐνέτυχον τη
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NPN — Article · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
T-NPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
σκέλος (skelos) refers to the leg, specifically from the hip downwards. It appears in the New Testament in John 19:31-33, where it describes the legs of crucified individuals. The term has also been used in various contexts, including military phrases and metaphorical expressions, but its primary meaning remains anatomical.
σκέλος, -ους, τό
[in LXX for רֶגֶל, etc. ;]
the leg from the hip downwards: Jo 19:31-33 †
σκέλος, -ous, τό, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. 6. from the hip to the toes inclusive: Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.
σκέλος, “‘a leg.” For the literal sense, as in Jn 19%! cf. P Par 1215 (B.c. 157) σπασάμενος λέπει pe τῇ μαχαίρᾳ εἰς TO , σκέπασμα σκέλος, P Lips I. 3755 (a.p. 380) κατέκοψα[ν] πίληγ]αῖς αὐτὸν κατά [Tle τῶν σκελῶν καὶ κατὰ τῶν ἄλλων μελῶ[ν] τοῦ σώματος, and Aristeas 151 ἣ γὰρ ἰσχὺς τῶν ὅλων σωμάτων per ἐνεργείας ἀπέρεισιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὦὥμους ἔχει καὶ τὰ σκέλη. For the derived use of σκέλος in connexion with the building of irrigation works, cf. P Petr III. 39%: 15 (iii/B.c.) εἰς τὰ] ἐντὸς σκέλη τῆς ἀφέσεως τῆς [ἐν τῆι ἐγ]βατηρίαι, and 26.11.9, 11-9, ΟἹ, also PSI IV. 4372 (B.c. 247-6) περὶ τὰ σκεα τοῦ πλοίου, where the editor suggests a possible oKéA
σκέλος (skelos) — leg.
σκέλος, εος, τό,
leg from the hip downwards, only once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the ham or buttock, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ σκέλη τε καὶ τὰ ἰσχία πρὸς τὴν γῆν ἐρείσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of dancers, τὸ σ. ῥίψαντες, αἴρειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐρανῷ σκέλη προφαίνων, of one thrown head foremost, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βαδιοῦνται ἐπὶ δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ᾽ ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ δεινός, ὁ ταλαύρινος, ὁ κατὰ τοῖν σκελοῖν he with the legs, the strider, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σκέλε (i.e. probably σκέλει) δύο [Refs 4th c.BC+]: singular, leg of sacrificial victim, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →σκέλος
skelos
apparently from skello (to parch; through the idea of leanness); the
leg (as lank):--leg.
σκέλος, ους, τό
n.n.
the leg
σκέλος skelos 3x
the leg, Jn. 19:31, 32, 33*
σκέλος the leg from the hip downwards, Hdt., etc.; πρυμνὸν σκέλος the ham or buttock, Il.:—as a military phrase, ἐπὶ σκέλος πάλιν χωρεῖν, ἀνάγειν to retreat with the face towards the enemy, Lat. pedetentim, Eur., Ar.
metaph., τὰ σκέλη the legs, i. e. the two long walls between Athens and Peiraeus, Strab.; τὰ μακρὰ σκ. Plut.
Noun-NPN — Noun · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
N-NPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
→ Of the crucified, broken Joh 19:31,32
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
11,22)—ἑρπετὸν δ’ ἐστὶν ἔχον ἀνωτέρω σκέλη τῶν ποδῶν, οἷς ἀπὸ γῆς πέφυκε πηδᾶν καὶ μετέωρον αἴρεσθαι καθάπερ τὸ τῶν ἀκρίδων γένος —·
τὸ χῶμα τὸ κατὰ τὸν βασιλικὸν πύργον Παῦνι μυριὰς α Εσ εἰς τὰ ἐντὸς σκέλη τῆς ἀφέσεως τῆς ἐν τῆι ἐγβατηρίαι Παχὼνς μυριάδες ε χμ Παῦνι μυριάδες γ Γψμ
μ μέσος μελάγχρως στρογγυλοπρόσωπος. Ἀπολλόδοτος ὡς ἐτῶν μ μέσος μελίχρως στρογγυλοπρόσωπος χωλαίνων τὸ δεξιὸν σκέλος. Στρατοκλῆς ὡς ἐτῶν λβ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος ἐπίγρυπος οὖς δεξιὸν τετρημένος. ἐγράφη ἔτους ιϛ
μου περιελέσθαι τὸ ἱμάτιον καὶ ἐμοῦ ἀντιποιουμένου σπασάμενος λέπει με τῆι μαχαίραι εἰς τὸ σκέλος, ὥστε χωλὸν ἕως τοῦ νῦν μʼ εἶναι. διὸ ἀξιῶ, ἐπεὶ σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς καὶ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
αἴρω, transliterated as airō, is a Greek verb meaning to lift, raise, or take up. It encompasses a range of actions such as bearing or carrying something away, and it can also refer to the figurative act of raising one's voice or expiating sin. The New Testament uses this word in contexts like lifting a bed (Mark 2:9) and bearing the cross (Matthew 16:24).
αἴρω (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ἦρα, inf. ἄραι, impv. dpov; pf. ἦρκα (Col. ii. 14); Pass., (pres. αἴρομαι]; pf. ἦρμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ἤρθην; (on the rejection of iota subser. in these tenses see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. dpOjcopa; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. NWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise upwards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rey. x. 5; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ; τὴν ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly (with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.) ; in Jn. x. 24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and hope, cf. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. ¢. to draw up: a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (ἀνασπᾶν, Hab. i. 15)…
Read the full entry →αἴρω. For αἴρω, “raise,” (ii/A.D.) ἄραι τὴν χεῖρα, and so 70. 607% 57. for αἴρειν χεῖρας may be specially noted, the Alexandrian inser. in Predsigke 1323 (ii/A.D.): θεῷ ὑψίστῳ καὶ πάντων ἐπόπτῃ Kal Ἡλίῳ καὶ Νεμέσεσι αἴρει ᾿Αρσεινόη ἄωρος τὰς χεῖρας. The inscr. is heathen, but has striking similarity to the Jewish prayer for vengeance on which Deissmann comments in ZAZ p. 423 ff. : is its thought partly due to Jewish suggestion? In P Fay 103% (iti/A.D.) payment is allotted to the bearers of a corpse—tois ἠρκάσι “lift up,”? as in Rev τοῦ, cf. Syd/ 807% One passage (4-601) αὐτόν : cf. P Grenf 11. 77° (iii/iv A.D.) ( = Se/ec- | tions, p. 120). In a magical formula of iii/A.D. instructions are given to take twenty-nine palm leaves, on whicn the names of the gods have been inscribed, and then —épe (= alpe) κατὰ δύο δύο, ‘‘Jift them up two by two,” P Oxy VI. 8861 ( = Selections, p. 111). A…
Read the full entry →αἴρω (airō) — to take up.
ἀείρω,
Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, and poetry; αἴρω (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. (except [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἀέρρω, [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἤειρον (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρον[Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. ᾖρον: future ἀρῶ [ᾱ], contraction for ἀερῶ (which is not found), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἤειρα (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 7th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρα[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect imperative ἀέρρατε[Refs 7th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἀέρσῃ[Refs]; participle ἀείρας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἦρα[Refs 5th c.BC+], 3rd.pers.plural ἤροσαν[LXX+3rd c.BC+], infinitive ἆραι[Refs 3rd c.BC+], participle ἄρας[Refs 5th c.BC+] in all moods]: perfect ἦρκα[Refs 4th c.BC+], (ἀπ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect ἤρκεσαν (ἀπ-) [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle ἀείρομαι (ἀπ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἴρομαι [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →αἴρω
airo
a primary root; to lift up; by implication, to take up or away;
figuratively, to raise (the voice), keep in suspense (the mind),
specially, to sail away (i.e. weigh anchor); by Hebraism (compare
5375) to expiate sin:--away with, bear (up), carry, lift up, loose,
make to doubt, put away, remove, take (away, up).
see HEBREW for 05375
αἴρω
v.
I raise, lift up
αἴρω airō 101x
to take up, lift, raise; bear, carry; take away, remove; destroy, kill
αἴρω epic and poet. ἀείρω q.v. distinguish ἀρῶ from ἀ_ρῶ, contr. of ἀερῶ. Act.
to take up, raise, lift up, Il., etc.; αἴρειν βῆμα to step, walk, Eur.; αἴρ. σημεῖον to hoist a signal, Xen.:—Pass. to mount up, ascend, id. Xen.
often of armies and ships, αἴρ. τὰς ναῦς to get the fleet under sail, Thuc.:—also intr. to get under way, start, set out, ἆραι τῶι στρατῶι id. Thuc.;—so in Mid. and Pass., Hdt., etc.
to bear, sustain, μόρον Aesch.; ἆθλον Soph.
to raise up, exalt, Aesch.:—of passion, to exalt, excite, ὑψοῦ αἴρειν θυμόν to grow excited, Soph.; αἴρειν θάρσος to pluck up courage, Eur., etc.: Pass., οὐκ ἤρθη νοῦν ἐς ἀτασθαλίην Simon.
to raise by words, to extol, exaggerate, Eur., Dem.
Verb-APS-3P — Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · pluralaorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-APS-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Plural
103 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 55 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 101 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 132 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τοῦ μὲν γὰρ γεγονότος ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τὸν πατέρα καὶ ποιητὴν αἱρεῖ λόγος·
οἱ δὲ συνέντες ἰσχὺν αὐτῷ καὶ μέγεθος πραγμάτων τὴν ὄψιν προλέγουσαν καὶ κατʼ αὐτῶν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἐσομένην τῷ μὲν Ἰωσήπῳ τούτων οὐδὲν ὡς οὐ γνώριμον αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄναρ ὂν διεσάφησαν, ἀρὰς δʼ ἐποιήσαντο μηδὲν εἰς τέλος αὐτῷ παρελθεῖν ὧν ὑπενόουν καὶ πρὸς…
τύπος ἐστὶν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ θέμενος, ὅτι ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ τὸ ἔριον ἆραι τὸ κόκκινον, δεῖ αὐτὸν πολλὰ παθεῖν διὰ τὸ εἶναι φοβερὰν τὴν ἄκανθαν, καὶ θλιβέντα κυριεῦσαι αὐτοῦ.
Ἐπιθυμήτῳ μηδὲ Τρυφωνίωνι ἂν μή σε ασ … α … …… ται τὸ καθέν” αἱρῶν ὅτι ὁ ἐπίτροπος ἔγνωκε ὅτι ἔχει τ … … … … … ἐνέχυρον, ἄν
σὺν Σεξτιλλίωι ἑκατοντάρχηι δραχμαὶ ξ παιδαρίωι δραχμαὶ η γείνεται τοῦ ιη ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ Αρη καὶ τοῦ ιθ ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ ω καὶ τιμῆς κλημάτων εἰς μοσχείαν δραχμαὶ ρκ
ἀρουρῶν δ γ μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἀκῆν καὶ ἄλλον ἀρουρῶν … μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἡρᾶν ἀρουρῶν μίσθωσις Μαχάτου καὶ ἄλλου πρὸς Με … είφιον μυμ … μίσθωσις Ἀμάειτος πρὸς